2008 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using this Manual
{CAUTION:
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Index
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do Not do this”
or “Do Not let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. A
box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things
that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the
warning.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move a manual seat forward or rearward:
1. Lift the bar to unlock
Front Seats
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters
To adjust a power seat:
On vehicles with power lumbar and side bolsters:
(A) Move forward or rearward to adjust lumbar support.
(B) Move up or down to adjust the side bolsters.
• Move the control forward or rearward to adjust the
seat forward or rearward.
• Move the front or rear of the control up or down to
adjust the height of the seat cushion.
Your seat position can be stored and recalled if you
have the memory option. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save seating positions in the memory:
Heated Seats
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, both outside mirrors, and
the telescopic steering column to a comfortable
driving position.
On vehicles with heated seats, the buttons are located
on the center console.
The ignition must be on for this feature to work.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you
know that the position has been stored in the
memory.
L: Press to turn the seat on at the high setting, and
twice to turn it to the low setting.
A second seating, mirror, and telescopic steering
column position can be set by repeating the above steps
and pressing button 2.
9: Press to turn the system off.
To recall a memory position:
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel
• On vehicles with an automatic transmission, press
and release the desired button.
On vehicles with the memory package, the controls are
located on the driver’s door.
If the vehicle is in PARK (P), a single beep sounds
and the memory position is recalled after a brief
delay.
1: Saves the seating position for driver 1.
2: Saves the seating position for driver 2.
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beeps sound
and the memory position is not recalled.
B: Recalls the easy exit position.
The numbers on the back of the keyless access
transmitters correspond to the numbers on the memory
buttons.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold the exit button until two beeps
sound to let you know that the exit position is
now programmed.
• On vehicles with a manual transmission, when the
vehicle is on, the parking brake needs to be set to
recall the memory position. Press and release
the desired button.
A second exit position can be programmed by repeating
the above steps and pressing button 2.
A single beep sounds and the memory position is
recalled after a brief delay.
To recall an exit position:
If the vehicle is on and the parking brake is not set,
three beeps sound and the memory position is
not recalled.
• On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
vehicle needs to be in PARK (P).
• On vehicles with a manual transmission, the
parking brake needs to be set.
For vehicles with the Auto Memory Recall, see “Auto
Memory Recall” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-72 for more information.
B: Press to recall an exit position.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, power
mirror or memory buttons, or the telescopic steering
column switch.
One beep will sound and the exit position for the
currently identified driver will be recalled.
For vehicles with the Auto Exit Recall, see “Auto Exit
for more information.
Easy Exit Seat
B(Easy Exit Seat): This button is used to program
and recall the desired driver’s seat exit position.
To program an exit position:
1. Recall the desired driving position by pressing
button 1.
2. Adjust the seat and the telescopic steering column
position to a comfortable exit position.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seats.
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To adjust the seatback, lean slightly forward to lift your
weight off the seatback. Pull completely up on the
lever until it stops, and lean back to position the
seatback to where you want it. Release the lever to lock
the seatback into place.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To unlock, lift up on the latch and push the seatback
rearward. When you return the seatback to its original
position, make sure the seatback is locked in place.
Seatback Latches
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Both seatbacks fold forward to give you access to the
rear area. To fold a seatback forward, lift this latch,
which is located on top of the backside of the seat, and
pull the seatback forward. The seatback will lock
down in this position.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
restrained properly too.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it
goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as much
protection this way.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system. See
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are
met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety
belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in
a side crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, then
return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in rear seating positions
than in the front seating positions.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use a
child restraint.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children should always be secured in
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
appropriate child restraints.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the
harness.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
information. A child can be endangered in a crash if the
child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
driving or in a crash. Some vehicles have lower and/or
top tether anchors designed to secure a child restraint
with lower attachments and/or a top tether.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
Your vehicle does not have lower anchors to
accommodate lower attachments. Your vehicle does
have a top tether anchor. If your child restraint has a top
tether, make sure your child restraint is properly
installed using the top tether anchor and the vehicle’s
safety belt. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor. Refer to your child
restraint instructions and see Securing a Child
Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1-40
for instructions on securing your child restraint using
the vehicle’s safety belts.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint. Make
sure the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that restraint.
In order to use the top tether anchors in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint equipped with a top tether.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
top tether. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with the top tether in your vehicle.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) (Z06 Models Only)
Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part
of the LATCH system, your child restraint may have
lower attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCH
system can help hold the child restraint in place during
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top Tether Anchor Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
To assist you in locating the
top tether anchors, the top
tether anchor symbol is
The top tether anchor is located behind the
passenger seat.
located on the trim cover.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
Securing a Child Restraint with a Top
Tether
{CAUTION:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the trim cover to
open the cover and expose the anchor.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the tether over
the headrest or head
restraint.
1. Secure the child restraint using the vehicle’s safety
belt. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a dual tether,
route the tether around
the headrest or head
restraint.
Some child restraints with a top tether are designed to
be used whether the top tether is anchored or not.
Other child restraints require that the top tether
be anchored. A national or local law may require that
the top tether be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or top tether
anchors to secure a child restraint with the LATCH
system. If a national or local law requires that your top
tether be anchored, do not use a child restraint in
this vehicle because a top tether cannot be properly
anchored. You must use the safety belts to secure your
child restraint in this vehicle, unless a national or
local law requires that the top tether be anchored. Refer
to your child restraint instructions and instructions in
this manual for securing a child restraint using the
vehicle’s safety belts. See Securing a Child Restraint in
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) (Coupe and
Convertible Models Only)
Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part of
the LATCH system, your child restraint may have
lower attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCH
system can help hold the child restraint in place during
driving or in a crash. Some vehicles have lower
and/or top tether anchors designed to secure a child
restraint with lower attachments and/or a top tether.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has airbags. In addition, your vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) under
on page 3-36 for more information on this, including
important safety information.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
child restraint using LATCH. If you secure a child
restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see
locations.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), the
off indicator on the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit when you start the
vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-36.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to
the instructions that came with the child restraint
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator in the
passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay
on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child restraint
in this vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may have the following airbags:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
There is an airbag
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted airbags.
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags for
the driver and right front passenger, they are in the
side of the seatbacks closest to the door.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
Your vehicle may have one or two seat position
sensors, depending on what model you have. The seat
position sensor(s) enable the sensing system to
monitor the position of the driver’s seat (all models
except Z06) and the right front passenger’s seat
(all models). Seat position sensor(s) provide information
that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy
at a reduced level or at full deployment.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
Your vehicle may or may not have seat-mounted side
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are intended to inflate
in moderate to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
impact airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that
is struck.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For seat-mounted side impact airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity
of the side impact.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest
to the door.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some
people may not even realize the airbags inflated. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical
attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn on
the hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
United States
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
system. Improper service can mean that the
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will
page 3-36.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible in the rearview
mirror when you start your vehicle.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbags are off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if:
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child restraint
in this vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) anytime the system senses that a person of
adult size is sitting properly in the right front
passenger’s seat. When the passenger sensing system
has allowed the airbags to be enabled, the on
indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the
airbags are active.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped), the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes. This will
allow the system to detect that person and then
enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. This may unintentionally cause the passenger
sensing system to turn the airbag(s) off for some
adult size occupants. If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
page 1-58 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-35 for more on this, including
important safety information.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
page 7-16.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
the inside review mirror, front sensors, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
Your dealer/retailer and the service manual have
information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-35 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Storage Areas ................................................2-55
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The windows will function
with the keyless access transmitter in the
vehicle and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless access
transmitter in a vehicle with children.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The key, located inside the
keyless access transmitter,
can be used for the
Your vehicle has a keyless access system with
for information on starting the vehicle.
glove box and can open
the hatch/trunk lid if vehicle
power is lost. See Hatch
on page 2-14 for more
information.
Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s) and/or
key, it could be difficult to get into your vehicle. You
may even have to damage your vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have a spare transmitter and/or key.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
page 7-8.
Keyless Access System
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
Industry Canada.
To remove the key, press
the button (A) near the
bottom of the keyless
access transmitter, and
pull the key out. Never pull
the key out without
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
pressing the button.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Keyless Access System Operation
Your vehicle has a keyless access system that allows you
to lock and unlock your doors, unlock your hatch/trunk lid
and disarm or arm your theft-deterrent system. The range
distance is as much as 100 feet (30 m) away.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless access
transmitter range, try doing one of the following:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Your vehicle comes standard with two transmitters, and
up to four can be matched to your vehicle. See “Matching
Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” later in this section.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Q(Lock): Press this button to lock the doors. The light
on the door will flash once. If this button is pressed
two times, the doors will lock, the light will flash and the
horn will sound.
• Check to make sure that an electronic device such
as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not
causing interference.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
K(Unlock): Press this button to unlock the driver’s
door. The light on the door will flash two times. Press the
button two times within 10 seconds to unlock both
doors. If it is dark enough outside, your interior lamps
will come on.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each keyless access transmitter is coded to allow
only transmitters programmed to your vehicle, to work.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased and programmed through your dealer/retailer.
Your dealer/retailer can reprogram your vehicle so lost
or stolen transmitters no longer work with your vehicle.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters
matched to it.
Your memory settings may also be recalled when you
press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
}(Hatch/Trunk): Press and hold this button for
about one second to open the hatch/trunk lid while the
engine is turned off. If the engine is running the shift
lever needs to be in PARK (P) for an automatic
transmission or NEUTRAL with the parking brake set for
page 2-34.
To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when you
have a recognized transmitter (two recognized
transmitters are required for Canadian owners):
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Have the recognized and new, unrecognized
transmitters on your person.
L(Panic): Press this button to sound the vehicle
alarm. Press any other button on the keyless access
transmitter to stop the vehicle alarm.
3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehicle
key into the key cylinder located above the license
on the key cylinder.
4. Open the trunk.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
6. The DIC will display READY FOR FOB #X, where
X can be 2, 3 or 4.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Canadian immobilizer standard requires Canadian
owners to see their dealer/retailer for matching new
transmitters when two recognized transmitters are not
available. United States owners are permitted to match a
new transmitter to their vehicle when a recognized
transmitter is not available. The procedure will require
three ten minutes cycles to complete the matching
process.
1. The vehicle must be off.
7. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons
facing towards the passenger’s side.
8. Once the transmitter is programmed, a beep will
sound. The DIC will display READY FOR #X, where
X can be 3 or 4, or MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS
LEARNED.
9. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch).
2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons
facing towards the passenger side.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehicle
key into the key cylinder located above the license
on the key cylinder.
15. A beep will sound and the DIC will read READY
FOR FOB #1. At this time, all previously known
transmitters have been erased.
16. Once the transmitter is recognized and
programmed, a beep will sound and the DIC will
display READY FOR FOB #2.
4. Open the trunk.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
If you have additional transmitters to program, take
transmitter 1 out of the transmitter pocket and place
transmitter 2 in the pocket. This can be done repeatedly
until up to four transmitters have be programmed.
The DIC will then display MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
FOBS LEARNED and will exit the programming mode.
6. The DIC message will display OFF-ACCESSORY
TO LEARN.
7. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch).
8. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
When you are done programming transmitters, press
the Acc. button (ignition switch).
9. The DIC will display OFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARN
again.
10. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch).
Battery Replacement
11. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
Under normal use, the battery in your keyless access
transmitter should last about three years.
12. The DIC will display OFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARN
again.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the
normal range in any location. If you have to get close
to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it is
probably time to change the battery.
13. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch).
14. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display NO
FOBS DETECTED when you try to start the vehicle.
If this happens, place the transmitter in the glove
box transmitter pocket with the buttons facing towards
the passenger’s side. Then, with the vehicle in PARK (P)
for an automatic transmission, press the brake pedal
and the START button. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, press the clutch and the START button.
Although this will start the vehicle, it is recommended
that you replace the transmitter battery as soon as
possible. The DIC may display FOB BATTERY LOW.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the slot on
the side or back of the transmitter and separate the
bottom half from the top half.
2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter.
3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)
side down. Use a battery, type CR2032, or
equivalent.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put it
together so water will not get in.
5. Test the transmitter.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doors and Locks
CAUTION: (Continued)
Door Locks
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked it
will not open. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash
if the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, press the lock or unlock button on
the keyless access transmitter.
whenever you drive.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open a door from the inside, press the button (B) in
front of the door handle and push the door open.
You will hear a tone when the button is pressed.
If power to the vehicle or the keyless access transmitter
is lost, there are two ways to open the door.
Door Open to Show Location of Door Handle Sensor
When you have the transmitter with you, you may also
unlock and open the door by squeezing the door
handle sensor (A). You do not have to press the unlock
button on the transmitter. You will be able to open
the door when you press the door handle sensor and
the vehicle recognizes your keyless access transmitter.
When the passenger door is opened first, the driver’s
door will also unlock.
From inside the vehicle, use the door release handle
located on the floor next to each seat. Pull the handle up
to unlock and unlatch the door.
From the inside, use the power door lock switch located
at the top of the door panel near both windows. See
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the doors.
There is an indicator light on the rear of the door
near the window.
K(Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closed
when pressed, the light flashes twice. If the door is open
when pressed, the light flashes.
Q(Lock): Press to lock the doors.
When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closed when
pressed, the light comes on for a few seconds, then turns
off. If the door is open when pressed, the light stays on.
From outside the vehicle, use the key in the cylinder
above the license plate to open the hatch then use the
door release tab located on the carpet inside the trunk on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. Pull the tab to unlock and
information on opening the trunk during a loss of power.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the vehicle stopped and the engine running, door
unlocking can be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). These
prompts allow the driver to choose various unlock
settings. For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Automatic Door Lock
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out
of PARK (P) for automatic transmissions, or when vehicle
speed becomes faster than 8 mph (13 km/h) for manual
transmissions, both doors will lock.
If someone needs to get out while the vehicle is running
or not in PARK (P), have the person use the power
door unlock switch. When the door is closed again, the
doors will lock either when your foot is removed
from the brake or the vehicle speed becomes faster
than 8 mph (13 km/h).
Lockout Protection
Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn
three times and unlock the driver’s door when both
doors are closed and there is a keyless access
transmitter inside the vehicle. When the driver’s door is
opened, a reminder chime will sound continuously.
The vehicle will remain locked only when at least one
transmitter has been removed from the vehicle and both
page 3-72.
Programmable Automatic
Door Unlock
Your vehicle is programmed so that when the shift lever
is moved into PARK (P) for automatic transmission
vehicles or when the ignition is turned off or is in
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) for manual
transmission vehicles, both doors will unlock.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Closing the hatch/trunk lid forcefully or
from the sides can cause damage to the glass, the
defogger or the weather stripping. Be sure objects
will fit in the hatch/trunk area before closing the
hatch/trunk lid. When closing the hatch/trunk
lid, gently pull down from the center.
Hatch
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the
hatch/trunk lid open because carbon monoxide
(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can
not see or smell CO. It can cause
Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the
rear storage compartments located in the
hatch/trunk area. If you do, the objects could
damage the underbody.
unconsciousness and even death. If you must
drive with the hatch/trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the hatch/trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Dual Automatic
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hatch/Trunk Lid Release
There are several ways to release the hatch/trunk lid. If
your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in PARK (P). For manual transmission
vehicles, the parking brake must be set when the ignition
is started for the hatch/trunk release to operate. The
parking brake does not need to be set when the ignition
is off for the hatch/trunk release to operate. See
• V (Hatch/Trunk): Press the hatch/trunk lid
release button, located on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel. The theft-deterrent
alarm system must not be armed.
• } (Hatch/Trunk): Press the hatch/trunk lid
release button on the keyless access transmitter.
If your vehicle has lost battery power, open the
for more information. The key lock cylinder is located
on the rear of the hatch/trunk lid above the license plate.
Turn the vehicle key clockwise in the lock.
• Press the hatch/trunk release button located on the
rear of the hatch/trunk lid above the license plate,
as long as you have your transmitter with you.
Closing the Rear Compartment (Coupe)
To assist in closing the rear compartment lid of
your coupe, use the pocket on the underside of the lid
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. When closing the
lid, lower it until the power pull down latch feature
activates and it will close the rest of the way and latch
automatically.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
(Convertible Only)
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the rear wall of the trunk below
the latch. This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open the
trunk from the inside.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
The power window
switches are located on
each door.
Pull up or press down on the front of the switch to raise
or lower the window.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) allows you to use the
power windows when the ignition is off. For more
page 2-23.
Express-Down Window
This feature is on both power windows. Press the front
of the switch to the second position to activate the
express-down feature. If you want to stop the window
as it is lowering, press the switch again.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Window Indexing
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
This feature automatically lowers the window a small
amount when the door is opened. When the door
is closed, the window will raise to its full up position. If
either window does not index properly, it could be due to
loss of power. Before returning to your dealer/retailer
for service, perform the power window initialize
procedure.
Pull down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose the
lighted vanity mirror. When the cover is lifted, the lamps
will come on automatically, even if the ignition is off.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Power Window Initialize
After a power reconnect such as battery replacement,
the window index-up feature will not function until
the system is initialized.
Theft-Deterrent System
Once power is restored:
1. Close the door.
Your vehicle is equipped with a theft-deterrent alarm
system.
2. Raise the window and hold the switch up for three
seconds after the window is closed.
With this system, the
security light will flash
when the door is open and
locked with the power
door lock switch.
3. Release the switch, then hold the switch up again
for three seconds and release.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also swing them to the side.
If this light is on continuously while the engine is
running, your vehicle needs service.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arming the System
Testing the Alarm
To arm the system:
To test the system:
1. Make sure the trunk lid/hatch is latched.
2. Lower the window on the driver’s door.
3. Manually arm the system.
• Press the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter.
• Open the door. Lock the door with the power door
lock switch. The security light should flash.
Remove the keyless access transmitter from inside
the vehicle and close the door. The security light
will stop flashing and stay on. After 30 seconds, the
light should turn off.
4. Close the doors and wait 30 seconds.
5. Reach through the open window and manually pull
the release lever on the floor.
6. Turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button on
the transmitter.
The vehicle can be programmed to automatically
lock the doors and arm the theft-deterrent system
when you exit the vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
If the alarm is inoperative, check to see if the horn
works. If not, check the horn fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
alarm doesn’t go off, see your dealer/retailer.
Now, if a door or the hatch/trunk is opened without the
keyless access transmitter, the alarm will go off.
Your horn will sound for two minutes, then it will go off
to save battery power. Your vehicle will not start
without a keyless access transmitter present.
Disarming the System
Always use your keyless access transmitter to unlock a
door either by pressing the unlock button on the
transmitter or by squeezing the door handle sensor
while you have the transmitter with you. Unlocking a
door any other way will set off the alarm. If your alarm
sounds, press the unlock button on the keyless
access transmitter to disarm it.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the
driver’s door with the power door lock switch after
the doors are closed.
If your passenger stays in the vehicle when you leave
with the keyless access transmitter, have the passenger
lock the vehicle after the doors are closed. This way the
alarm will not arm, and your passenger will not set it off.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Immobilizer
Immobilizer Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the ignition
mode transitions to off.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition
mode transitions to OFF/ACCESSORY or START and
a valid transmitter is found in the vehicle.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The system has one or more keyless access
transmitters that are matched to an immobilizer control
unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly matched keyless
access transmitter will start the vehicle. If the keyless
access transmitter is ever damaged, you may not
be able to start your vehicle.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be
a problem with your immobilizer system. Press
the START button again.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle does not start and the keyless access
transmitter appears to be undamaged, try another
keyless access transmitter. Or, you may try placing the
transmitter in the transmitter pocket. See “NO FOBS
DETECTED” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-55 for additional information. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and
not start with the other transmitter, your vehicle
needs service. If the engine does start, the first
transmitter may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer
who can service the theft-deterrent system and have
a new keyless access transmitter programmed to
the vehicle.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or
replacement keyless access transmitters. Up to 4
keyless access transmitters can be programmed for the
vehicle. To program additional transmitters, see
“Matching transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Keyless
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Air Dam
Ignition Positions
Your vehicle is equipped with a front air dam which has
minimal ground clearance.
Your vehicle has an
electronic keyless ignition
with a pushbutton start.
Under normal operation, the air dam will occasionally
contact some road surfaces (speed bumps, driveway
ramps, etc.). This can be heard inside the vehicle as a
scraping noise. This is normal and does not indicate
a problem.
Use care when approaching bumps or objects on road
surfaces and avoid them when possible.
In order to shift out of PARK (P), the vehicle must be
running or in ACCESSORY mode and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
/ (START): Press this button while your foot is on the
brake for an automatic transmission, or while pressing
in the clutch for a manual transmission, to start the
engine. If your vehicle is in OFF or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) mode, the keyless access transmitter
must be inside the vehicle to start the engine.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 Acc. (OFF/ACCESSORY): When the engine is on
or the vehicle is in accessory power mode, it is
recommended that a manual transmission be placed in
REVERSE (R). An automatic transmission must be
placed in PARK (P). Then press the Acc. button to turn
the engine off and place the vehicle in RAP. See
“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” later for more
information. If an automatic vehicle is not correctly
placed in PARK (P) a SHIFT TO PARK message will
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes after
the engine is turned off or until either door is opened.
If a door is opened, the power windows and audio
system will shut off.
For more information, see DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-55.
Starting the Engine
When the engine is off, press this button to place the
vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY MODE
ON will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
This mode allows you to use things like the radio
and the windshield wipers while the engine is off. Use
accessory mode if you must have your vehicle in motion
while the engine is off, for example, if your vehicle is
being pushed or towed.
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for
an automatic transmission. For a manual transmission
the vehicle can be started in NEUTRAL or any other
gear as long as the clutch is depressed. To restart
a manual transmission when you are already moving,
use the NEUTRAL position only. To restart an automatic
transmission when you are already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N).
After being in accessory mode for about 10 minutes, the
vehicle will automatically enter RAP or OFF, depending
on if the doors are opened or closed.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
The keyless access transmitter must be inside the
vehicle for the ignition to work.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cell phone chargers can interfere with the operation of
the Keyless Access System. Battery chargers should
not be plugged in when starting or turning off the engine.
3. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
4. If the engine does not start and no DIC message is
displayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again to let
the cranking motor cool down.
To start your vehicle, do the following:
1. For an automatic transmission, with your foot on the
brake pedal, press the START button located on the
instrument panel. For a manual transmission, while
pressing in the clutch, press the START button.
If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
while cranking for up to 15 seconds maximum. Wait
at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts,
let go of the accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine.
If there is not a keyless access transmitter in the
vehicle or if there is something causing interference
with it, the DIC will display NO FOBS DETECTED.
for more information.
2. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the
button and the engine cranks automatically until
it starts. If the battery in the keyless access
transmitter is weak, the DIC displays FOB
BATTERY LOW. You can still drive the vehicle.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by pressing the START button immediately
after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless Access
If the fob battery is dead, you need to insert the
fob into the fob slot to enable engine starting. See
“No Fobs Detected” under DIC Warnings and
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine and
protects components. Once cranking has been
initiated, the engine continues cranking for a few
seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start, cranking automatically stops after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
engine is already running.
Once the shifter is moved to PARK (P), the vehicle
turns off. If your vehicle has a manual transmission,
it is recommended that you move the shift lever to
REVERSE (R) and set the parking brake after you turn off
the engine by pressing the Acc. (Off/Accessory) button.
If the keyless access transmitter is not detected inside
the vehicle when it is turned to off, the DIC displays NO
FOB – OFF OR RUN?.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If electrical parts or
accessories are added, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer/retailer. If you do
not, the engine might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be covered by
your vehicle’s warranty.
more information.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
Stopping Your Engine
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, move the
shift lever to PARK (P) and press and hold the Acc.
(Off/Accessory) button, located on the instrument panel,
until the engine shuts off. If the shift lever is not in PARK
(P), the engine shuts off and the vehicle goes into the
Accessory Mode. The DIC displays SHIFT TO PARK.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not it could be
damaged.
To Use The Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side
of the engine compartment, in front of the coolant
surge tank.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Automatic Transmission Operation
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
There are several different
positions for your shift
lever.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
You have to fully apply your regular brakes first and
then press the shift lever button before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the vehicle is running. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into
page 2-36.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,
on page 4-23.
Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. If your vehicle
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It provide
the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If you need
more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
{CAUTION:
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
SPORT MODE (S): When in SPORT MODE (S), the
transmission will work as an automatic until you use the
Manual Paddle Shift Controls, which activates the
driver manual gear selection. See Manual Paddle Shift
later in this section. While in automatic SPORT
MODE (S), the transmission computer determines when
the vehicle is being driven in a competitive manner
and will select and hold the transmission in lower gears
and have more noticeable upshifts for sportier vehicle
performance.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the system, shift from PARK (P) position to
SPORT MODE (S) while stopped and with the engine
running, or from DRIVE (D) with the vehicle moving.
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to shift to second (2)
or third (3) gear. A higher gear allows you to gain
more traction on slippery surfaces. If the traction control
is active, upshifts are delayed to increase your control
of the vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-6.
Manual Paddle Shift
While in the SPORT MODE (S) position, the paddles
located on the steering wheel, can be used to manually
up-shift or down-shift the transmission.
While the Manual Paddle Shift gear selection system is
active, the transmission will automatically downshift
through the gears as the vehicle slows. The
transmission will select second gear as the vehicle
stops. From a stop, the vehicle will start from and hold
second (2) gear unless the driver manually paddle
shifts into a different gear or selects DRIVE (D). The
driver can select first (1) gear for maximum acceleration
from a stop.
While in the SPORT MODE (S) mode, push the paddle
above the steering wheel spokes to up-shift to the
next gear, or pull on the paddle behind the steering
wheel spokes to down-shift to the next gear.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When using the Manual
Paddle Shift Feature while
in the SPORT MODE (S),
the current gear will be
displayed in the Driver
Information (DIC), or the
Head-Up Display (HUD), if
the vehicle has either of
these features.
When the transmission gear does not respond to a shift
change, the DIC will show an X over the gear display.
When a requested shift is
denied due to the speed
restrictions shown, the DIC
will momentarily show
an X over the gear display
and a chime will sound.
If your vehicle has a Navigation system, see “Head-Up
Display (HUD)” in the Index of the navigation manual.
The Manual Paddle Shift system will not allow either an
up-shift or a down-shift if the vehicle speed is too
fast or too slow, nor will it allow a start from Fourth (4)
or higher gear
If the vehicle has a HUD, and the transmission gear
does not respond to a shift change, then a chime
will sound and the HUD will momentarily show an X
over the gear display.
If up-shifting does not occur when needed, the vehicle
speed will be limited to protect the engine.
Manual Paddle Shift operation is available for use with
more information.
The transmission will also automatically down-shift as
the vehicle slows down and comes to a stop.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle speeds required for Manual Paddle Shift
up-shifts depend on several vehicle inputs, which
will vary the allowed up-shift speed by a few mph (km/h).
Manual Transmission Operation
This is the shift pattern for
the six-speed manual
transmission.
• Up-shifts to Fourth (4) gear require approximately
22 mph (35 km/h).
• Up-shifts to Fifth (5) gear require approximately
28 mph (45 km/h).
• Up-shifts to Sixth (6) gear require approximately
41 mph (65 km/h).
To prevent damage to the powertrain, Manual Paddle
downshifts to a lower gear cannot be done above certain
speeds. The maximum speed allowed for downshifting
of gears one (1) through fourth (4) are:
Here is how to operate your transmission:
• Into Fourth (4) gear over 168 mph (270 km/h)
• Into Third (3) gear over 124 mph (200 km/h)
• Into Second (2) gear over 81 mph (130 km/h)
• Into First (1) gear over 45 mph (72 km/h).
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 40 mph (64 km/h). If you come to a complete stop
and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
If the driver does not request an upshift as the engine
speed approaches fuel shut off RPM, the engine
speed will be limited to protect the engine. See
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
Your six-speed manual transmission has a feature that
allows you to safely shift into REVERSE (R) while
the vehicle is rolling at less than 3 mph (5 km/h). You
will be locked out if you try to shift into REVERSE (R)
while your vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h).
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6): Shift
into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6)
the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on
the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Do not shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL when it is
centered in the shift pattern, not in any gear.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Just apply pressure
to get the lever past FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) into
REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while
pressing the accelerator pedal.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear
for the best fuel economy.
One to Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
Manual Transmission Recommended
Shift Speeds in mph (km/h)
When this light comes on,
you can only shift from
FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4)
instead of FIRST (1) to
SECOND (2).
Acceleration Shift Speed
1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
Engine
All
15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72) 50 (80)
Engines
If your engine speed drops below 900 rpm, or if the
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to
the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two
or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or
for good engine performance.
page 3-38 for more information.
Notice: When shifting gears, do not move the shift
lever around unnecessarily. This may damage
the transmission. Shift directly into the next gear.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Downshifting (Manual Transmission)
Parking Brake
Do not downshift into the gear shown below at a speed
greater than shown in the table:
The parking brake lever is located to the right of the
center console.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
Pull the parking brake lever up. If the ignition is on, the
brake system warning light will come on.
FIRST (1)
SECOND (2)
THIRD (3)
50 mph (80 km/h)
74 mph (119 km/h)
101 mph (163 km/h)
130 mph (209 km/h)
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Then push the release button in as you move the
parking brake lever all the way down.
FOURTH (4)
Notice: If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, or if you race the engine when you
release the clutch pedal while downshifting, you
could damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or the
transmission. Do not skip gears or race the
engine when downshifting.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
The six-speed transmission has a spring that centers
the shift lever near THIRD (3) and FOURTH (4).
This spring helps you know which gear you are in when
you are shifting. Be careful when shifting from
FIRST (1) to SECOND (2) or downshifting from
SIXTH (6) to FIFTH (5). The spring will try to pull the
shift lever toward FOURTH (4) and THIRD (3).
Make sure you move the lever into SECOND (2) or
FIFTH (5). If you let the shift lever move in the direction
of the pulling, you may end up shifting from FIRST (1)
to FOURTH (4) or from SIXTH (6) to THIRD (3).
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Transmission)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold down
the regular brake pedal. See if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
information.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the lever and pushing the lever all the
way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch) to turn the
engine off.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting
Into PARK (P)” listed previously in this section.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the transmission parking pawl, so you can
pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
Prevent shifting out of PARK (P) unless the vehicle
is running or in Accessory mode and the regular brake
pedal is applied.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission)
Engine Exhaust
Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever
into REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking
brake. Once the shift lever has been placed into
REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can
turn the ignition off and release the clutch.
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
Parking Over Things That Burn
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
{CAUTION:
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Map Lamps
Mirrors
The mirror has map lamps located at the bottom of the
mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or off, press
the button next to each lamp.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Compass Operation
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with OnStar®, a compass and map lamps.
Three OnStar® buttons are at the bottom of the mirror.
The mirror has an eight-point compass display in the
bottom of the mirror face.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for
information on the services OnStar® provides.
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the current compass heading.
For example, NE is displayed for north-east.
Mirror Operation
The mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
headlamps behind you. A time delay feature prevents
rapid changing from the day to night positions while
driving under lights and through traffic.
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds the display does not show a
compass heading, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, note
pad holder or similar object. If the letter C appears in
the compass window, the compass needs calibration.
P(On/Off): The automatic dimming feature is
activated when the vehicle is started. The automatic
dimming feature is turned on or off by pressing
this button located on the lower part of the mirror. Press
and hold the button for up to three seconds to turn
this feature on or off.
The mirror compass can be calibrated by driving
the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
T(Indicator Light): This light will turn on when the
automatic dimming feature is active.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode by
pressing and holding the left map light button until a C
appears on the compass display.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted for compass variance, your compass
could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, such as a long
distance, cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust the compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appears on the display. The
compass is now in zone mode.
3. Once the zone number appears on the display,
press the on/off button quickly until you reach
the correct zone number. Stop pressing the button
and the mirror will return to normal operation.
If C appears in the compass window, the compass
may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”
listed previously.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Compass Display
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the compass display on or off.
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to be
calibrated. For more information, see “Compass
Calibration” later in this section.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing °F, or °C
appears.
If the vehicle has this feature, an automatic dimming
mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize
glare at night from lights behind your vehicle.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will
return.
The mirror also includes a compass display in the upper
right corner of the mirror face.
P(On/Off): This is the on/off button.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please consult your
dealer/retailer. Under certain circumstances, a delay in
updating the temperature is normal.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on each
time the ignition is started. A light near the on/off button
will come on to indicate the automatic dimming is on.
Press the on/off button for about six seconds to
manually turn the automatic dimming function on or off.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the mirror’s
compass could give false readings. The mirror is
set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will also be necessary to adjust
for compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Calibration
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
The controls for the
outside power mirrors
are located on the
driver’s door.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or
until CAL is displayed.
Move the top selector control to the left or right to select
either the driver’s or passenger’s mirror. To adjust the
direction of the mirror, use the arrows on the round
four-way control. Adjust each outside mirror so that a
little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be
seen while sitting in a comfortable, driving position.
Keep the control in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the memory feature, a preferred mirror
position can be stored. See Memory Seat, Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
Both mirrors are heated to rid them of snow, ice, or
condensation. They will heat when the rear window
defogger is turned on. See “Rear Window Defogger”
page 3-25.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Both mirrors can manually be folded inward by pulling
them toward the vehicle. This feature may be useful
when going through a car wash or a confined space.
Push the mirrors away from the vehicle, to the normal
position, before driving.
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,
look farther away than they really are.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s side
outside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps
behind you. This feature is controlled by the on and off
setting on the inside mirror.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar. A
complete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar
Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827) or TTY
1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar button to speak
with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this
plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions
& Connections Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an
OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Virtual Advisor
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentary
minutes
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-Free
Calling that uses your minutes to access location-based
weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. By
pressing the phone button and giving a few simple voice
commands, you can browse through the various topics.
See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information (only
available in the continental U.S.).
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
How OnStar Service Works
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call
Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the accident that your
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your
vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based services.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
this means that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by a dealer/retailer. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
is active.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
3521A-GTV06A.
Universal Home Remote
System
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate
number is KOBGTV06A.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or
go to www.learcar2u.com.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the
device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
programming. You only need the original remote control
transmitter for Fixed Code programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of
the vehicle, the programmed buttons should be
erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
To program up to three devices:
When programming a garage door, it is advised to park
outside of the garage. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or security device
you are programming.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that you would
like to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above the
selected button, should slowly blink. You may
need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-5, choosing
a different function button in Step 3 than what you
used for the garage door opener.
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete the following steps.
If these instructions do not work, you probably have a
Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or
go to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the
device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door
opener, remove the battery cover on your hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer
of your garage door opener motor. If you see a row
of dip switches similar to the graphic above, you
have a Fixed Code garage door opener. If you
do not see a row of dip switches, return to
the previous section for Programming Universal
Home Remote – Rolling Code.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your hand held transmitter may have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
Your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
may also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program your Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
you do not have the original hand held transmitter.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter
may be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position may be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be labeled as
“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position may be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in Step
2 will now become the button strokes you
enter into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4.
Be sure to enter the switch settings that you
wrote down in Step 2, in order from left to right,
into the Universal Home Remote, when
completing Step 4.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now
press one button on the Universal Home Remote
for each switch setting as follows:
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all
three buttons at the same time for about
three seconds. Release the buttons to put the
Universal Home Remote into programming mode.
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating
the instructions.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to use to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. You may need to hold the
button from five to 55 seconds.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
You should erase the programmed buttons when you
sell or terminate your lease.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same
time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what you used for
the garage door opener.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure that the driver side floor mat is properly
placed on the floor so that it does not block the
movement of the accelerator pedal.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To remove a floor mat, pull
up on the rear of the mat
to disconnect it from
the locator pins.
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use the key
to lock and unlock. The glove box has a light inside.
Cupholder(s)
There are two cupholders located on the center console
next to the shift lever. To access, place your thumb on the
left side of the lid and slide the handle to the right.
Center Console Storage
To use this storage area, pull up the lid on the driver’s
side front edge of the console and swing it to the
passenger side.
To reinstall the floor mats, line up the openings in the
floor mat over the locator pins and push it down
into place.
Floor Mats
The floor mats are designed to remain in position under
your feet and out of reach of the accelerator pedal.
The driver side floor mat is held in place by two locator
pins and the passenger side is held in place by one.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For Z06 models the right rear compartment stores the
battery and cannot be used for storage.
Rear Storage Area
There are two rear storage compartments in the floor of
the rear hatch/trunk area.
Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the
rear storage compartments located in the
hatch/trunk area. If you do, the objects could
damage the underbody.
Rear Trunk Partition
For vehicles with the power convertible top option only,
there is a trunk partition to keep cargo from getting
in the way of the convertible top. The trunk partition must
be in place for the top to move. If the trunk partition is
not properly in place the ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION
Driver Information Center (DIC) message will display
and you will not be able to remove the convertible top.
more information.
The trunk partition is a flat carpeted board with a
horizontal flap that can be attached to the top of the
trunk to divide the storage compartment or stored
flat when not in use.
Convertible shown, Coupe similar
Your vehicle has two storage compartment lids.
To access a storage compartment, pull up to open the
lid. The lids cannot be removed.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Cover
If your vehicle has this feature, the security shade can
provide hidden storage in the rear area of the vehicle.
The shade is also helpful in blocking the glare from the
removable roof when it is stored in the rear compartment.
Using the Cargo Cover
1. Hook the elastic loops
on the front corners (A)
of the shade to the
T-nuts located on the
front corners of the rear
hatch frame.
Pull the divider up and snap it onto the snaps on both
sides of the trunk.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of
the vehicle. Put small loads behind the net. The net is not
for heavier loads. Store them as far forward as you can.
2. Hook the elastic loops on the rear corners (B) of the
shade to the hooks recessed inside the rear hatch
frame, near the rear corners.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the loop to the
top of the striker
(base plate).
Roof Panel
The vehicle may have a removable roof panel. Follow
the procedures listed when removing or installing it.
3. Grasp the loop at the rear center of the shade and
wrap it around the striker assembly.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lower both sun visors.
Removing the Roof Panel
4. Open the rear hatch and remove any items that may
interfere with proper storage of the roof panel.
5. Lower the windows.
{CAUTION:
There are two release latches on the front of the
roof panel and one rear release latch on the back of
the roof panel.
Do not try to remove a roof panel while the
vehicle is moving. Trying to remove the roof
panel while the vehicle is moving could cause
an accident. The panel could fall into the
vehicle and cause you to lose control, or it
could fly off and strike another vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Remove the roof panel
only when the vehicle is parked.
Until you are sure you can remove the panel alone,
have someone help you.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its edges,
the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping may be
damaged. Always place the roof panel in the stowage
receivers after removing it from the vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake.
Shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P). Shift
a manual transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. To unlock the release latches on the front of the
roof panel, grasp each handle with your fingers
and pull it outward.
2. Make sure the ignition is off.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. To unlock the rear of
the roof panel’s rear
release latch, press the
back of the release
handle (B). Then press
the button on the
front of the release
handle, (A) with
your thumb.
Pull down the latch lever with your fingers.
8. Stand on one side of the vehicle, and if necessary,
have someone stand on the other side. Together,
carefully lift the front edge of the roof panel up
and forward.
The driver’s side handle moves toward the driver’s
door. The passenger’s side handle moves toward
the passenger’s door.
9. When the roof panel is loosened from the vehicle,
one person should grasp the roof panel as close to
the center as possible and lift it away from the
vehicle.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Turn the roof panel so that the front edge of the
panel is facing the storage area.
Storing the Roof Panel
2. Insert the roof panel so
that the outside front
edges line up between
the receiver covers.
Push forward on
{CAUTION:
If a roof panel is not stored properly, it could
be thrown about the vehicle in a crash or
sudden maneuver. People in the vehicle could
be injured. Whenever you store a roof panel in
the vehicle, always be sure that it is stored
securely in the proper location.
the roof panel until
it stops.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its
edges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place the roof panel in
the stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
3. Gently place the roof
panel down so that the
back pins on the
roof panel drop into the
receivers in the back
of the storage area.
Press down firmly to seat the pins in the receivers.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most cases, it makes it easier if two people re-install
the roof panel.
Installing the Roof Panel
1. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake.
Shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P). Shift
a manual transmission into NEUTRAL.
{CAUTION:
2. Check that the front release latches and the rear
release latch on the vehicle’s roof opening are in
their opened positions before attempting to
install the roof panel.
An improperly attached roof panel may fall into
or fly off the vehicle. You or others could be
injured. After installing the roof panel, always
check that it is firmly attached by pushing up on
the underside of the panel. Check now and then
to be sure the roof panel is firmly in place.
3. If the roof panel is stored in the rear storage area of
the vehicle, grasp the rear edge of the roof panel
with both hands and gently lift it up and remove
it from the storage area.
4. Carefully place the roof panel over the top of the
vehicle.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its
edges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place the roof panel in
the stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
5. Position the rear edge of the roof panel to the
weatherstrip on the back of the roof opening.
Then align and fit the pins at the rear of the roof
panel inside the openings in the rear overhead
weatherstrip. Gently lower the front edge of the roof
panel to the front of the roof opening.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Turn the front release
handles inward so that
they latch to the
Convertible Top
closed position.
Convertible Top (Manual)
For care and cleaning of the convertible top, see
Appearance Care”. High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
If the vehicle has this feature, the following
procedures explain the proper operation of the
manual convertible top.
7. Push up on the handle of the rear roof release
handle to latch its hook in the closed position.
8. Push and pull the roof panel up and down and
side-to-side to ensure the roof panel is securely
installed.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The parts of the manual convertible top that are used
when lowering and raising it are:
Notice: Lowering the convertible top when there
are objects in the storage area could damage
it or break the glass rear window. Always verify that
no objects are in the storage area before lowering
the convertible top.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the
inside of your vehicle. Dry off the top before
lowering it.
Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in cold
weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may damage
top components. Do not lower the top in cold
weather.
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible top
while the vehicle is in motion, you could damage the
top or the top mechanism. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always put an
automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual
transmission in NEUTRAL before raising or lowering
the convertible top.
A. Front Edge of the Convertible Top
B. Rear Edge of the Convertible Top
C. Tonneau Cover
Notice: Leaving the convertible top down and
exposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage. Always close
the convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lowering the Manual Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface. Shift an automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and set the parking
brake. Shift a manual transmission into NEUTRAL
and set the parking brake.
2. Make sure the ignition is off.
3. Make sure the trunk is closed.
5. Lift upward on the front edge (A) of the convertible
top off of the windshield frame. Then lift upward on
the rear edge (B) of the convertible top so it is
vertical to the tonneau cover (C). The front edge (A)
and rear edge (B) should be straight up.
4. The convertible top front latch, located above the
inside rearview mirror, must be unlocked. Pull the
convertible top front latch down and turn it clockwise
to unlock it.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After pressing the release button, the driver’s and
passenger’s door glass should retract to the
full-down position.
If the vehicle has lost battery power, the tonneau
cover (C) can still be opened using the manual
release cable.
The tonneau cover emergency manual release
cable is located underneath the carpeting behind the
passenger’s seat head restraint, on the underside
forward edge of the tonneau cover. To access
the cable, lift and pull back the carpeting. Also, see
emergency trunk release handle.
Notice: If you lower the convertible top into the
storage compartment and the rear edge of the top is
not in the full-down position, you could damage
the top. Always verify that the rear edge of the
convertible top is in the full-down position before
lowering the top into the storage compartment.
6. Tilt the driver’s seatback forward and press the
tonneau cover release button located on the
underside of the tonneau cover (C) behind the
driver’s seat. Then raise the tonneau cover (C).
If the tonneau cover does not release and
three chimes are heard, check to make sure the
trunk lid is closed. Also, the cover will not release if
the vehicle alarm is armed.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Pull the cable to release the tonneau cover.
8. Push forward on the front edge (A) of the
convertible top to allow the rear edge (B) of the
convertible top to be moved to its full-down position.
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Raising the Manual Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface. Shift an automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and set the parking
brake. Shift a manual transmission into NEUTRAL
and set the parking brake.
2. Lower both windows.
3. Make sure the ignition is off.
4. Tilt the driver’s seat forward and press the tonneau
cover release button, or use the manual release
cable if battery power has been lost. See Step
6 under “Lowering the Manual Convertible Top”
earlier in this section.
After pressing the release button, the driver’s and
passenger’s door glass should retract to the
full-down position, if they have not already been
lowered.
9. Then move the top rearward to its fully-stored
position.
10. After the top is stored, apply one even push on the
center of the front edge (A) of the convertible top to
assure that the top is fully retracted.
5. Lift the tonneau cover.
11. Close the tonneau cover (B) by pressing down on it
with a swift, firm motion.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Pull the convertible top up by firmly gripping the
front edge (A) near the center and applying a
brisk upward and forward motion to get the top in
the full-up position.
7. Lift the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to its
full-up position by first raising the front edge (A).
8. Close the tonneau cover (C) by pushing it down
with a swift, firm motion.
9. Lower the rear edge (B) of the convertible top by
first slightly pushing the front edge (A) of the
convertible top forward.
10. Push the front edge (A) of the convertible top down
from the outside of the vehicle, or pull the front
edge (A) of the convertible top down from the center
pull-down handle located in the inside of the vehicle.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To operate the power convertible top use the following
steps.
Notice: Leaving the convertible top down and
exposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage. Always close
the convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.
Notice: Lowering the convertible top when there
are objects in the storage area could damage
it or break the glass rear window. Always verify that
no objects are in the storage area before lowering
the convertible top.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the
inside of your vehicle. Dry off the top before
lowering it.
11. Pull the top front latch handle down and turn it
counterclockwise to lock the convertible top.
Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in cold
weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may damage
top components. Do not lower the top in cold
weather.
Convertible Top (Power)
For care and cleaning of the convertible top see
Appearance Care”. High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible top
while the vehicle is in motion, you could damage the
top or the top mechanism. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always put an
automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual
transmission in NEUTRAL before raising or lowering
the convertible top.
Lowering the Power Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface. Start the engine. Shift an
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and set the
parking brake. Shift a manual transmission into
NEUTRAL, and set the parking brake.
2. Make sure the trunk is closed and the rear trunk
partition in the rear storage area is in the fastened
upright position, and that no objects are forward
of the divider. See “Rear Trunk Partition” under
3. Release the convertible top front latch, located
above the inside rearview mirror, by pulling and
turning it clockwise toward the driver’s door. Push
upward on the front edge. The windows will
automatically lower.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Raising the Power Convertible Top
4. Push and hold the
bottom of the power
convertible top button,
located to the left of
the steering wheel, on
the instrument
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible top
while the vehicle is in motion, you could damage the
top or the top mechanism. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always put an
automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual
transmission in NEUTRAL before raising or lowering
the convertible top.
panel.
1. Park on a level surface. Start the engine. Shift an
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and set the
parking brake. Shift a manual transmission into
NEUTRAL and set the parking brake.
The windows will automatically lower and the convertible
top will lower into the rear of the vehicle. A chime will
sound when the convertible top has lowered completely.
If the radio is on the sound may be muted for a brief time
due to a new audio system equalization being loaded.
2. Make sure the trunk lid is closed and the rear trunk
partition in the rear storage area is in the fastened
upright position, and that no objects are forward
of the divider. See “Rear Trunk Partition” under
If the convertible top is operated multiple times, the
engine should be running to prevent drain on the
vehicle’s battery. Under certain conditions, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) may display a message
regarding the power convertible top. See DIC Warnings
3. Push and hold the top of the power convertible top
button. The top will raise and the windows will lower
if they were in the raised position. A chime will
sound when the top is raised completely.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. After the convertible top is completely raised,
release the power convertible top button.
If the vehicle has lost power, the convertible top can still
be raised by releasing pressure on the hydraulic
pump, located under the passenger’s side of the
tonneau cover, by using the following steps. The carpet
liner on the passenger’s side must be pulled back to
access the hydraulic pump.
5. Pull the convertible front top latch down and turn it
counterclockwise to lock the convertible top.
Manual operation of the power convertible top cannot
be attempted for five minutes from the last time the
convertible top button was pressed if the top is
not completely stowed, with the top down and the
tonneau latched, or closed, with the front top latch
locked in place, at the time the convertible top button
was released.
If the radio is on the sound may be muted for a brief
time due to a new audio system equalization being
loaded.
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be careful when opening the tonneau cover by hand.
If the tonneau cover is opened quickly, damage can
occur to the hinging mechanism, which can prevent
proper operation of the convertible top.
1. Open the tonneau cover by pulling the emergency
release cable.
The tonneau cover emergency release cable is
located behind the passenger’s seat head restraint,
on the underside forward edge of the tonneau
on the emergency trunk release handle.
2. Locate the pressure release bolt on the front side of
the hydraulic pump.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Use the wrench, located in the console, and turn
the pressure release bolt counterclockwise one
revolution, to relieve pressure to the hydraulic
pump. This will allow you to manually raise
the convertible top.
If the power convertible top is operated multiple times,
the engine should be running to prevent drain on
the vehicle’s battery. Under certain conditions, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) may display a message
regarding the power top. See DIC Warnings and
4. Then follow the steps under raising the manual
convertible top. See “Convertible Top (Manual)”
If the battery has been disconnected, the power
windows must be initialized for the power top to
more information.
When power is restored to the vehicle, the hydraulic bolt
must be tightened, by turning it clockwise. The power
convertible top button can then be used to lower or raise
the convertible top.
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Security Light ...............................................3-47
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
B. Head-Up Display Controls (If Equipped).
page 5-8. Hatch/Trunk Release Button. See “Hatch/
P. Power Folding Top Switch (If Equipped).
G. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
on page 3-10.
on page 4-7.
page 3-30.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 4-10.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
mode the ignition is in, even if the ignition is turned off.
page 2-55.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the
flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
near the center of the
instrument panel.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Telescopic Steering Column
Tilt Wheel
If your vehicle has this feature, the telescopic steering
column will allow you to adjust the distance the steering
wheel is from the instrument panel.
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level
to give your legs more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
The telescopic steering
column switch is located
on the right side of
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
the steering column.
To operate the telescopic steering column, push the
switch forward and the wheel will move away from you.
Pull the switch rearward and the wheel will move
toward you
The telescopic steering column position can be
stored with your memory settings. See Memory Seat,
information.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Then move the wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
(Auto Signal)
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the multifunction lever all the
way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
turn or lane change.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Release the lever and
the turn signal will automatically flash three times.
If more flashes are desired, continue to hold the lever.
page 3-9.
If you signal a turn or a lane change and the arrows flash
faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out.
page 3-11.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuses and check for burned-out
page 3-15.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal on Chime
A chime will remind you if you leave the turn signal on for
more than three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km) of driving.
Windshield Wipers
If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than
three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal
and then turn it back on.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high,
push the turn signal lever all the way forward. To change
from high to low beam, pull the lever rearward.
Use the lever located on the right side of the steering
column to operate the windshield wipers.
While the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be lit.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at high speed.
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at low speed.
& (Delay): Move the lever to this position to set a
delay between wipes.
Flash-to-Pass
x (Delay Adjustment): Move the lever to this
position to choose a delayed wiping cycle. Turn
the intermittent adjust band down for a longer delay or
up for a shorter delay. The wiper speed can only be
manually adjusted when the lever is in this position.
To use the flash-to-pass feature, briefly pull the turn
signal lever toward you. The high-beam indicator flashes
to indicate to the other driver that you intend to pass.
If the low-beam headlamps are off and the fog lamps are
on, the fog lamps flash.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
{CAUTION:
8(Mist): Move the lever all the way down to mist
and release for a single wiping cycle. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes,
hold the band on mist longer.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If this
occurs, a circuit breaker will stop the wipers until the
motor cools. So, be sure to clear any ice and snow
from the windshield wiper blades before using them.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen them or warm the windshield before turning
the wipers on. If your blades do become worn or
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is
low, the message CHECK WASHER FLUID will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will
take 15 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this
message to turn off. For information on the correct
page 6-11.
Windshield Washer
The lever on the right side of the steering column also
controls the windshield washer. There is a button at the
end of the lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield,
press the button and hold it. The washer will spray until
you release the button. The wipers will continue to clear
the window for about six seconds after the button is
released and then stop or return to your preset speed.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise Control
Your vehicle has cruise
control.
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
9 (Off): Slide the switch to this position to turn the
system off.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
R (On): Slide the switch to this position to turn the
system on.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Slide the switch to this
position to make the vehicle accelerate or resume a
previously set speed.
If your vehicle is in cruise control, and has the Traction
Control System (TCS), and it begins to limit wheel
spin, the cruise control automatically disengages. See
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you can
turn cruise control back on.
T (Set): Press this button at the end of the lever to
set the speed.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you do not need
to reset it.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
keeps going faster until you release the switch or apply
the brake. Do not hold the switch at resume/accelerate,
unless you want the vehicle to go faster.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When the cruise control is engaged, the CRUISE SET
TO XX MPH message displays on the Driver Information
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle
slows down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed.
If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Of course,
applying the brake turns off the cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not use
cruise control on steep hills.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed desired, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press and hold the set button until you reach the
lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control in Sport (S) and Manual
Paddle Shift Gear Selection
Ending Cruise Control
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal. If your vehicle has a manual transmission,
lightly tapping the clutch will also end a cruise control
session.
When your vehicle is in Sport (S) and the manual
paddle shift controls are not being used, cruise control
operates in the same manner as Drive (D).
Move the cruise control switch to off to turn the system
completely off.
When your vehicle is in Sport (S) and the manual
paddle shift controls are being used, cruise control
operates as follows:
When cruise control is disengaged, the CRUISE
DISENGAGED message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
• If cruise control is active and a gear is selected
with the manual paddle shift controls, the vehicle
maintains vehicle speed in the driver selected gear
and will not automatically up-shift or down-shift the
transmission while the driver’s gear selection is
active.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
• If driving in hilly terrain, cruise control may not be
able to maintain vehicle speed if an up-shift or
down-shift is not selected by the driver. While driving
on hilly terrain and cruise control is active with a
manual paddle shift gear selection, the driver must
select the proper gear for the terrain or select Drive
(D) on the gear range selector for full automatic
transmission operation.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the band to this position
to set the exterior lamps in automatic mode. AUTO
mode turns the exterior lamps on and off depending
on how much light is available outside the vehicle.
Exterior Lamps
To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off.
To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exterior
lamps and then back to AUTO. Automatic mode also
resets when your vehicle is turned off and then back on
again if the control is left in the AUTO position.
;(Parking Lamp): Turning the band to this position
turns on the parking lamps together with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
The exterior lamp control is located to the left of the
steering wheel on the multifunction lever.
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The parking brake indicator light comes on and stays
on when the parking lamps are on with the engine
off and the ignition to Acc.
The exterior lamp band has four positions:
O(Off): Turn the band to this position to turn off
all lamps.
5(Headlamps): Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This feature activates the headlamps and parking
lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use
for approximately 15 seconds and deactivates and
returns to ambient lighting conditions 15 seconds
after the wipers are turned off.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in
Canada.
If the exterior lamp control has been turned off or is
in the parking lamp position while the wiper control is
active in any position, the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
message appears on the Driver Information Center
The DRL system will make the front turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off.
• The exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P) or the
parking brake is off.
Headlamps on Reminder
• The parking brake is off or the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps will
be on. No other exterior lamps such as the parking
lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the DRL are being
used. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps turn off and the normal low-beam headlamps
turn on.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When it is bright enough outside, the regular lamps go off,
and the front turn signal lamps will take over. If the
vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, the
instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual.
Make sure the instrument panel brightness knob is in the
page 3-19 for more information.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior lamp control to the
off position or shift into PARK (P). The DRL will stay
off until the control is toggled again or the vehicle
is shifted out of PARK (P).
This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in the
United States.
Fog Lamps
Use fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control
is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will
display on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC).
The fog lamps control is located on the multifunction
lever next to the exterior lamp control.
-(Fog Lamps): Turning the band to this position will
turn the fog lamps on.
Turning the exterior lamp control to off a second time, or
turning on the headlamps will remove the HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message in the DIC. If the parking
lamps or the fog lamps were turned on instead, the
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will continue
to be displayed.
When you turn the fog lamps on, the fog lamp light will
appear on the instrument panel cluster to indicate
that the fog lamps and the parking lamps are on.
If you turn the high-beam headlamps on, the fog lamps
will turn off. They will turn on again when you switch
to low-beam headlamps.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Twilight Sentinel®
Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and off for you.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is not covered.
With Twilight Sentinel®, you will see the following
happen:
You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even when
it is dark outside.
After starting the vehicle, turn the exterior lamp control
band on the multifunction lever to off and then release it.
The lamps will remain off until you turn the control band to
off again.
Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination as
you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turned
on the lamps when you turn off the ignition, your lamps
will remain on until:
• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps
that come on with headlamps will also come on.
• The exterior lamp switch is moved from off to the
parking lamp position, or
• When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps
will go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL)
will come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch
is in the AUTO position.
• A delay time that you select has elapsed.
See “Personal Options” under DIC Vehicle
that you want. You can also select no delay time.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you
leave the garage, it will take about one minute for the
automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light
outside. During that delay, your instrument panel cluster
may not be as bright as usual. Make sure your instrument
panel brightness control is in full bright position. See
If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switch
in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
Sentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off
as soon as the switch is turned off.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure not to have this knob turned all the way
down with the lamps on during the day. Your Driver
Information Center (DIC) may not be visible.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the manual parking lamps or headlamps have been left
on, the exterior lamps will turn off as soon as the ignition
is turned off or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. This protects against draining the battery in
case you have accidentally left the headlamps or
parking lamps on. The battery saver does not work
if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition switch
is turned to off.
Courtesy Lamps
When any door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened, the
interior lamps will go on unless it is bright outside.
You can also turn the courtesy lamps on and off
by pressing the instrument panel brightness knob.
If you need to leave the lamps on, use the exterior lamp
control to turn the lamps back on.
Entry/Exit Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
entering the vehicle. The interior lamps will come on
for about 20 seconds when the engine is off.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob for this feature is
located on the left side of
the instrument panel.
You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly turning
the courtesy lamps on and off.
Reading Lamps
The inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.
The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When
the doors are closed, each lamp can be turned on
individually by pressing the switch for that lamp.
Push the knob in to turn on the interior lights.
Turn and hold the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim them. During the day, this knob
will adjust the instrument panel brightness and at night
will adjust all interior lighting.
An ambient light is located in the passenger sun visor
clip. This light stays on while driving to keep the
cabin from being too dark.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The information may be displayed in English or metric
units and appears as an image focused out toward
the front of the vehicle. The HUD consists of the
following information:
Battery Run-Down Protection
This vehicle has a feature to help prevent the battery
from being drained in case any of the following
lamps are left on; the underhood lamp, if your vehicle
has this feature, vanity mirror lamps, cargo lamps,
reading lamps, console or glove box lamps. If any of
these lamps are left on, they will automatically time-out
after about 10 minutes. To reset it, all of the above
lamps must be turned off or the ignition key on.
• Speedometer
• Turn Signal Indicators
• High-Beam Indicator Symbol
• Tachometer
• Manual Paddle Shift Gear Indicator (If Equipped)
Head-Up Display (HUD)
These displays on the HUD are for use when
using the manual paddle shift controls to shift
the transmission. See “Manual Paddle Shift” in
{CAUTION:
• Shift Light
This light is used for performance driving to indicate
that the vehicle’s best performance level has been
reached to shift the transmission into the next higher
gear. An arrow pointing up will light up on the display
just prior to reaching the engine fuel cut-off mode.
This cut-off is about 6,500 RPM for the LS3 engine
and 7,000 RPM for the LS7 engine.
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time
to see things you need to see when it is dark
outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.
If your vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD), you can
see some of the driver information that appears on
the instrument panel cluster.
• Check Gages Warning
• Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Track Mode 1 supports the
G-Force gage and minor
gages with a circular
tachometer.
• Transmission Fluid Temperature Gage,
(Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only)
• Engine Oil Temperature Gage
• Engine Oil Pressure Gage
• G-Force Gage
• Audio Functions, Street Mode Only
• Navigation, Only with Navigation Radio,
Turn-by-Turn Guidance
Track Mode 2 supports
G-Force gages and minor
gages with a linear
tachometer.
There are three HUD modes that you can choose to view
in the HUD display. By pressing the MODE button, you
can scroll through these modes in the following order:
Street Mode supports
audio and navigation
functions with your choice
of tachometer settings.
When the desired HUD display has been selected,
release the MODE button.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Within each mode, the display, can be further
customized by pressing the PAGE button. Pressing this
button in each mode will turn off and on the following:
• Street Mode — No tachometer, circular tachometer,
and linear tachometer.
• Track Modes 1 and 2 — No minor gage, coolant
temperature, transmission oil temperature, engine
oil temperature, and engine oil pressure.
While in Track Mode 1 or 2, the maximum G value
achieved during the current ignition cycle can be
displayed by pressing and holding the PAGE button.
The maximum G display will be shown until the
PAGE button is released. The maximum G value
display will be identical to the normal G value
display, except the maximum G gage digits (X.XX G)
and corresponding G gage bar will overwrite the
current G value.
Be sure to continue scanning the displays, controls and
driving environment just as you would in a vehicle without
HUD. If you never look at your instrument panel cluster,
you may miss something important, such as a warning
light. Under important warning conditions, the CHECK
GAGES warning will illuminate in the HUD. View your
Driver Information Center (DIC) for more information.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The HUD controls are
located to the left of the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position.
If you change your seat position later, you may
have to re-adjust your HUD.
3. Press the up or down arrows to center the HUD
image in your view.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,
not side-to-side.
4. Press the dimmer control downward until the HUD
image is no brighter than necessary.
To turn HUD off, press and hold the (–) button until the
HUD display turns off.
If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, you
may need to adjust the HUD brightness again
using the dimmer control. Polarized sunglasses
could make the HUD image harder to see.
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do the
following:
1. Start the engine and press the HUD dimmer control
all the way up by pressing the (+) button.
The HUD information can be displayed in one of
six languages including English, Spanish, French,
German, Italian or Japanese. The speedometer
can be displayed in either English or Metric units.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by
the light conditions in the direction the vehicle is
facing and where you have the HUD dimmer control
set. If you are facing a dark object or a heavily
shaded area, your HUD may anticipate that you
are entering a dark area and may begin to dim.
To change the language and unit selections, see
page 3-50.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
of the HUD image.
It is possible for sunlight to enter the HUD making it
difficult to see the image. The display will return to
normal when the sunlight is no longer entering
the HUD.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because
the cleaner could leak into the unit.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
If the ignition is on and you can not see the HUD
image, check to see if:
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience
a problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on accessory power outlets.
• Something is covering the HUD unit.
• The HUD dimmer control is adjusted properly.
• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
• Ambient light is low, in the direction your vehicle is
facing.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
page 5-96.
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUD
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
We recommend that you see a qualified technician or
your dealer/retailer for the proper installation of your
equipment.
The accessory power outlet can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
CB radio.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
The accessory power outlet is located inside the center
console storage compartment, on the forward left side.
To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. When not
using it, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located on the
instrument panel, in front of the shift lever. To use the
ashtray, press on the indentation at the top of the door.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Loose objects, such as paper clips, can lodge behind
and beneath the ashtray lid and prevent movement
of the lid. You should avoid putting small, loose objects
near the ashtray.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
When the vehicle is first started, the display will show the
driver’s temperature setting, the outside temperature, the
fan speed and the air delivery, for about 10 seconds.
The outside temperature is shown in the center of the
display. The digital display will show the readings in
Fahrenheit or Celsius. See “Personal Options” under
on changing your display.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take
from 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,
if necessary.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button to place the
entire system in the automatic mode. When automatic
operation is active, the system will automatically control
the inside temperature, the air delivery mode, and the
fan speed.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensor” later in
this section.
After a ten second display of the current settings,
the word AUTO, the driver’s temperature setting and
the outside temperature will be shown. The system will
operate to achieve your comfort set temperature as
quickly as possible. The AUTO control system works best
with the windows up and the removable roof installed or
the convertible top up.
Manual Operation
Driver Power/Temperature: Press the driver
temperature knob on the driver side of the climate
control panel to turn the climate control system off.
This is the only setting that completely shuts off
the fan. The digital display will show only the outside
temperature. You can still adjust the driver and the
passenger set temperature and the air intake mode
when the climate control is off.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 60°F (16°C) and 90°F (32°C). Choosing
the coldest or warmest temperature setting will
not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
A setting of 73°F (23°C) is suggested.
Passenger Power/Temperature: Press the passenger
temperature knob on the passenger side of the climate
control panel to turn the passenger’s climate control
system on or off. Turn the knob to increase or decrease
the temperature for the passenger. If the passenger’s
climate control system is off, the driver’s temperature
knob will control the temperature for the entire vehicle.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will start
out blowing air at the floor but may change modes
automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain
the chosen temperature setting. The length of time
needed for warm up will depend on the outside
temperature and the length of time that has elapsed
since your vehicle was last driven.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing the arrows will delete AUTO from the digital
display. The fan graphics with the fan speed bars will be
shown. To increase the fan speed so that more air flows
into the vehicle, press the up arrow on the fan switch.
To decrease the fan speed and airflow, press the down
arrow. The AUTO button must be pressed to return to
the automatic fan control.
N(MODE): Press this button to manually lock in the
current air delivery setting and to stop the automatic
mode control. Pressing the MODE button will delete
AUTO from the digital display and the mode graphics
will be shown. To change the setting, press the
MODE button again. The AUTO button must be
pressed to return to the automatic mode selection.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information, see
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H(Vent): This mode directs most of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, with a very small amount of
air directed to the floor outlets.
%(Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the
air to the instrument panel outlets, and directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets.
?(Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on or off. When the climate control
system is in recirculation mode an indicator light will
come on. This mode prevents outside air from entering
your vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and
odors from entering your vehicle and to help cool the air
inside your vehicle more quickly. Recirculation mode is
not available in defrost or defog mode.
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side window
defogger outlets and some air directed toward the
windshield.
The MODE button can also be used to select the defog
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
^(Air Conditioning Off): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning compressor off. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation. When in AUTO, the air conditioning
compressor will come on automatically, as needed.
x 9 w(Fan): Press the button with the fan symbol
to manually increase or decrease the fan speed. Keep
pressing the up or down arrow on this switch until the
desired fan speed appears on the display.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Air conditioning does not operate at temperatures below
about 35°F to 40°F (2°C to 4°C). In temperatures above
40°F (4°C), the air conditioning cannot be turned off in
defrost and defog, as it helps to remove moisture from
the vehicle. It also helps to keep the windows clear.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
Sensors
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar
radiation and uses the information to maintain the
selected temperature when operating in AUTO mode by
initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the fan
speed and the air delivery system. The system may also
supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the
sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield or the
system will not work properly.
For quick cool down on hot days press the AUTO button
and adjust the temperature to a cool, comfortable setting.
To achieve maximum cool down, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select recirculation mode.
3. Select the A/C on.
There is also a sensor located behind the front bumper.
This sensor reads the outside air temperature and
helps to maintain the temperature inside the vehicle.
Any cover on the front of the vehicle could give a false
reading in the temperature.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the outside temperature goes up, the displayed
temperature will not change until:
Press the mode button until the defog mode appears on
the display.
• The vehicle’s speed is above 12 mph (19 km/h) for
five minutes.
• The vehicle’s speed is above 32 mph (52 km/h) for
two and a half minutes.
-(Floor/Defog): This mode directs the air equally
between the windshield and the floor outlets with a small
amount to the side window outlets. When you select
this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs
the air-conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation
mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode.
These delays prevent false readings. If the temperature
goes down, the outside temperature will be shown
when you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off for
less than three hours, the temperature will be recalled
from the previous vehicle operation.
1(Defrost): Pressing this button directs most of the
air to the windshield, with a small amount directed to the
side window outlets. The light on the button will come on
and the digital display will show the defrost mode symbol
and fan speed when the front defrost mode is being used.
In this mode, the system will automatically turn off the
recirculation and run the air-conditioning compressor,
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrost
mode. Pressing this button again will return the system
to the last operating mode.
There is also an inside temperature sensor located to
the left of the ignition switch. The automatic climate
control system uses this sensor to receive information,
so if you block or cover it, the system will not function
properly.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
and moisture condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use defrost to remove fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly. To prevent fogging on the inside of the
windows in modes other than floor/defog and defrost,
make sure the air conditioning compressor is on and
recirculation mode is off.
For severe ice conditions, turn the driver’s temperature
knob to 90°F (32°C) while in defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
engine is running.
=(Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on. Be sure to clear
as much snow from the rear window as possible.
An indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that the rear window defogger is activated.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the tab located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed when traveling less than
30 mph (48 km/h). If turned on again, the defogger
will only run for about five minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors.
The mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from
the surface of the mirrors when the rear window defog
button is pressed.
• Keep the area around the base of the instrument
panel console and air path under the seats clear
of objects to help circulate the air inside of
your vehicle more effectively.
If your vehicle has the power convertible top, the rear
window defogger and heated mirrors are automatically
disabled when the power convertible top is moving
or down.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To check or replace the air filter, do the following:
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter removes certain
particles from the air including pollen and dust particles.
Reductions in airflow, which may occur more often in
dusty areas, indicate that the filter may need to be
for information on how often to replace the filter.
Notice: Driving without a passenger compartment
air filter in place can cause water and small
particles, like paper and leaves, to be pulled into
your climate control system which may cause
damage to it. Make sure you always replace the
old filter with a new one.
1. Undo the passenger compartment air filter housing
cover retainer clips (A).
The passenger compartment air filter is located on the
passenger side of the engine compartment near the
page 5-14.
2. Remove the passenger compartment air filter
housing cover.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your
warning lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they are working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when there
is a problem with your vehicle.
3. Remove the passenger compartment air filter from
the housing.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They are a big help.
4. Insert the new filter into the housing.
5. Reinstall the passenger compartment air filter
housing cover.
6. Attach the passenger compartment air filter housing
cover retainer clips.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may
be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center that works
along with the warning lights and gages. See Driver
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to let you know at a glance how
the vehicle is running. You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have left and many
other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically. The instrument panel cluster indicator
warning lights, gages and DIC messages are explained on the following pages.
United States Manual Transmission shown, Canada, Automatic Transmission and Z06 Model similar
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in either
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
For more information see “Personal Options” under
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
To read the odometer with the ignition off, turn on the
parking lamps.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed,
the mileage total of the new odometer will be set
to the original miles (kilometers) of the old odometer.
See your dealer/retailer if the odometer must be
replaced in your vehicle.
Tachometer
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Notice: Fuel will shut off at about 6500 rpm for the
base model and 7000 rpm for the Z06 model. If you
continue to drive your vehicle at the fuel shut off rpm,
you could damage your engine. Be sure to operate
your vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm or reduce
your rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel
cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensor, the
pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and
the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system, see Airbag System
on page 1-44.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. The light
should go out and the
system is ready.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
when you start the engine. If the light does not come on
then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a problem
with the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information
Center (DIC) message may also come on. See DIC
information.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol,
to let you know the status to let you know the status of
the right front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbags (if equipped).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag and
United States
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is or
airbags are off.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-35 for more on this, including
important safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
page 1-52 for more on this, including important safety
information.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voltmeter Gage
One-to-Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
The voltmeter shows the
voltage output of your
battery. When the engine
is running, it shows
the voltage output of
the charging system.
When this light comes on,
you can only shift from
FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4)
instead of FIRST (1) to
SECOND (2).
You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) to turn off
this feature. This helps you get the best possible fuel
economy.
The reading will change as the rate of charge changes
(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeter
reads at 9 volts or below, your instrument panel cluster
and other systems may shut down. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) will read BATTERY VOLTAGE
LOW when your vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have it
checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading at
10 volts or below could drain your battery and disable
your vehicle.
After shifting to FOURTH (4), you may downshift to a
lower gear if you prefer.
Notice: Forcing the shift lever into any gear except
FOURTH (4) when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light comes
on may damage the transmission. Shift only from
FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) when the light comes on.
This light will come on when:
• The engine coolant temperature is higher than
169°F (76°C),
• the vehicle is going 15 to 19 mph (24 to 31 km/h) and
• the vehicle 21 percent throttle or less.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on while you are driving and you have a
CHECK BRAKE FLUID message showing on the DIC,
pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that
the pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to
the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your
on page 3-55 for more information.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
United States
Canada
This light should come on when you start the engine.
If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If this warning light stays on after you start the engine,
the parking brake may still be set or there could be
to see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, have
your brake system inspected right away.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
This light should come on
briefly as you start the
System (ABS), this
light will come on briefly
when you start the engine.
engine. If the light does not
come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
If it stays on, or comes on and the Driver Information
Center (DIC) shows a SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
message when you are driving, there is a problem
with your Traction Control System (TCS) and your
vehicle needs service. When this light is on, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If the driver turns off the TCS by pressing the button
on the console, the TCS light will come on and the
TRACTION SYSTEM OFF message will show on the
for more information.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
brake related DIC messages.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system is working, you will see the ACTIVE
HANDLING message displayed in the DIC. You may also
feel or hear the system working. This is normal.
Active Handling System Light
The Active Handling System light will come on briefly
as you start the engine. If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem. This light will also come on when
the ACTIVE HANDLING CALIBRATING message
is displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
If the driver turns off the Active Handling System by
pressing the button on the console for five seconds,
the Active Handling System light will come on, a chime
will sound, and the TRACTION SYSTEM AND
ACTIVE HANDLING – OFF message will be displayed
in the DIC. The Traction Control System will also be
page 3-55 for more information.
If the light stays on or
comes on while you are
driving, a chime sounds
and a SERVICE ACTIVE
HANDLING SYSTEM
message appears on the
DIC, there is a problem
with your Active Handling
System and your vehicle
needs service.
If the Active Handling System and the Traction Control
System are off, pressing the console button momentarily
will turn both systems on. The DIC will display the
TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLING – ON
message, the instrument cluster light will be off, and
a chime will sound. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-55 for more information.
The driver can acknowledge this message by pressing
the RESET button. When the SERVICE ACTIVE
HANDLING SYSTEM message is displayed in the DIC,
the Active Handling System will not assist you in
controlling the vehicle. You should have the system
serviced as soon as possible. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
United States
Canada
This light will also come on when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area,
your engine is too hot.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center
(DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and
This means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to
do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System, this light will flash for approximately
60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-68 for more information.
information.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate
that there is an OBD II
problem and service
is required.
This light comes on briefly, as a check to show it is
working, as you start the engine. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light also comes
on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If the Light Is Flashing
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the engine off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn
off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
engine light, will light up and the ignition will be on,
but the engine will not start — if you press the bottom
of the Acc. button only briefly, less than five seconds,
the accessory power mode will be turned on, but not
the ignition. After the bulb check, be sure to press and
release the Acc. button again to turn the ignition off
and avoid draining the vehicle’s battery.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This may take several days of routine driving.
If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
To perform a check engine light bulb check with the
keyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in the
page 2-22. Press the bottom of the Acc. button on the
instrument panel and hold the button down for five
seconds. The instrument panel, including the check
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine
oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals) when the engine is running.
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa).
In certain situations such as long, extended idles on hot
days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and still
be considered normal. It may vary with engine speed,
outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings
above the shaded area show the normal operating
range. Readings in the shaded area tell you that the
engine is low on oil, or that you might have some other
The engine oil pressure can also be displayed using the
GAGES button on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
United States
Canada
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
United States — Z06
Model
Canada — Z06 Model
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Lights On Reminder
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-18.
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
information.
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
for more information.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are five things that some owners ask about.
All these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel
you have left when
the engine is on.
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads the full symbol.
• It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage
reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it
took more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacity
to fit it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking
or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate the tank is empty when
the ignition is turned off.
When the needle approaches the low fuel symbol, a
chime will sound and LOW FUEL will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display. At this time, you
still have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon.
• The gage reading may change slightly within the first
several minutes after starting the vehicle.
information.
Press the RESET button to acknowledge a DIC
message(s). Pressing the RESET button will also
turn off a DIC message but the LOW FUEL message
will come on again in 10 minutes if you have not added
fuel to the vehicle.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the DIC display. Be sure to take any message that
appears on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the message will only make the message
disappear, not correct the problem.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the status
of many of your vehicle’s systems. It is also used to
display driver personalization features and warning/status
messages. The DIC display is located on the instrument
panel cluster below the speedometer and tachometer,
directly above the steering column. The DIC buttons
are located on the instrument panel, to the right of the
instrument panel cluster.
If your vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD) and
you use the Manual Paddle Shift feature, the gear
will display in the HUD, except if your vehicle has
the Navigation system and the HUD is displaying
turn-by-turn guidance information. If the HUD is
displaying turn-by-turn guidance information, the
gear instead displays in the DIC. See “Manual Paddle
page 2-26 and “Head-Up Display (HUD)” in the index
of the Navigation system manual for more information.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is turned on.
After displaying CORVETTE BY CHEVROLET, the DIC
will display the current driver and the information that
was last displayed before the engine was turned off.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2(Gages): Press this button to display gage
DIC Operation and Displays
information like oil pressure and temperature, coolant
temperature, automatic transmission fluid temperature, if
equipped, battery voltage, and front/rear tire pressures.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) has different modes
which can be accessed by pressing the following buttons
located on the instrument panel, to the right of the
instrument panel cluster.
TRIP: Press this button to display your total and
trip distance driven, the elapsed time function, your
average speed, and the engine oil life.
OPTION: Press this button to choose personal options
that are available on your vehicle, depending on the
options your vehicle is equipped with, such as door
locks, easy entry seats, and language.
RESET: Press this button, used along with the other
buttons, to reset system functions, select personal
options, and turn off or acknowledge messages on
the DIC.
.4(Fuel): Press this button to display fuel information
such as fuel economy and range.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Range: The range calculates the remaining
distance you can drive without refueling. It is based
on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.
FUEL Button
The fuel button displays average fuel economy and
instantaneous fuel economy, calculated for your specific
driving conditions, and range information.
Press the fuel button again to display the range,
such as:
Average Fuel Economy: The average fuel economy
is viewed as a long-term approximation of your overall
driving conditions. You should reset the average fuel
economy display every time you refuel. If you press the
RESET button in this mode while you are driving, the
system will reset this display and begin figuring fuel
economy from that point in time.
• RANGE 30 MI or
• RANGE 48 km
If the LOW FUEL warning is displayed or if RANGE
is less than 40 miles (64 km), the display will read
RANGE LOW.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated
automatically.
Press the fuel button to display average fuel economy,
such as:
• AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY 20.1 MPG or
• AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY 11.7 L/100 km
If the vehicle has been idling for a long time, the
range displayed on the DIC could be abnormally low.
The vehicle must be driven 5–10 miles (8–16 km) to get
an accurate reading.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy: Instantaneous fuel
economy reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle
has right now and will change frequently as driving
conditions change. Unlike average fuel economy,
this menu item cannot be reset.
Press the fuel button again to display instantaneous fuel
economy, such as:
• INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY 20.1 MPG or
• INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY 11.7 L/100 km
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coolant Temperature: This display shows the engine
coolant temperature.
GAGES Button
The gages button displays oil pressure, oil temperature,
coolant temperature, transmission fluid temperature
for automatic transmission vehicles only, battery voltage,
and tire pressure information.
Press the gages button again to display the coolant
temperature, such as:
• COOLANT TEMPERATURE 123°F or
• COOLANT TEMPERATURE 51°C
Oil Pressure: This display shows the oil pressure.
If the coolant temperature is low, the display will show
COOLANT TEMPERATURE LOW. If the coolant
temperature is high, the display will show COOLANT
TEMPERATURE HIGH.
Press the gages button to display the oil pressure,
such as:
• OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI or
• OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa
Transmission Fluid Temperature: If you have an
automatic transmission vehicle, this display shows the
automatic transmission fluid temperature.
Oil Temperature: This display shows the oil
temperature.
Press the gages button again to display the automatic
transmission fluid temperature, such as:
Press the gages button again to display the oil
temperature, such as:
• TRANS FLUID TEMP 123°F or
• TRANS FLUID TEMP 51°C
• OIL TEMPERATURE 234°F or
• OIL TEMPERATURE 112°C
If the transmission fluid temperature is low, the display
will show TRANS FLUID TEMP LOW. If the transmission
fluid temperature is high, the display will show TRANS
FLUID TEMP HIGH.
If the oil temperature is low, the display will show OIL
TEMPERATURE LOW. If the oil temperature is high,
the display will show OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Voltage: This display shows the current battery
voltage.
Odometer: The odometer shows how far your vehicle
has been driven in either miles or kilometers. Press
the TRIP button to display odometer readings, such as:
Press the gages button again to display the battery
voltage, such as:
• ODOMETER 12345 MI or
• ODOMETER 20008 km
• BATTERY VOLTAGE 13.5 VOLTS
You can also display the odometer by turning on the
parking lamps.
Tire Pressure: This display shows the tire pressure for
each tire.
Trip Odometers: There are two trip odometers.
Press the TRIP button to display TRIP ODOMETER A
readings and press the button again to display TRIP
ODOMETER B readings, such as:
Press the gages button again to display the tire pressure
for the front tires, such as:
• FRONT TIRE PRESSURES L 34 PSI R 33 PSI or
• FRONT TIRE PRESSURES L 234 kPa R 228 kPa
• TRIP ODOMETER A 130.5 MI or
• TRIP ODOMETER A 209.9 km
• TRIP ODOMETER B 300.5 MI or
• TRIP ODOMETER B 483.5 km
Both of the trip odometers can be used simultaneously.
TRIP A could be used to track the distance to a
destination. TRIP B could be used to track maintenance
periods. The trip odometers can be reset by pressing the
RESET button on the DIC.
Press the gages button again to display the tire pressure
for the rear tires, such as:
• REAR TIRE PRESSURES L 34 PSI R 33 PSI or
• REAR TIRE PRESSURES L 234 kPa R 228 kPa
TRIP Button
The TRIP button displays the odometer, trip distance,
elapsed time, average speed, and oil life remaining
information.
There is also a miles since last ignition feature that
displays the number of miles (kilometers) driven since
you last started the vehicle. Press and hold the RESET
button for three seconds, then release it. The miles
(kilometers) since the last ignition cycle will be set into
the trip odometer.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Elapsed Timer: Press the TRIP button until ELAPSED
TIMER is displayed, such as ELAPSED TIMER .00.
Engine Oil Life: Press the TRIP button until the engine
oil life is displayed, such as OIL LIFE REMAINING 89%.
This is an estimate of the engine oil’s remaining
useful life. It will show 100% when the system is reset
after an oil change. It will alert you to change the oil on
a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
When the ignition is in on, the DIC can be used
as a stopwatch. The display can show hours, minutes
and seconds. The elapsed time indicator will record
up to 23 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds, then it
will reset to zero and continue counting. The display
appears as ELAPSED TIMER .00 in the elapsed
time function.
When the remaining oil life is low, the system will alert
you with the message CHANGE ENGINE OIL.
Remember, you must reset the engine oil life system
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life System
on page 5-23. Be careful not to reset the engine oil life
system accidentally at any time other than when the
oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately
until the next oil change.
You can start or stop the elapsed time by pressing
the RESET button. To reset the elapsed time to zero,
press the RESET button for three seconds while
the timer is displayed.
Pressing and holding the RESET button for at least
10 seconds will reset the timer display to the time since
last ignition cycle.
Average Speed: Press the TRIP button until the
average speed is displayed, such as:
OPTION Button
• AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH or
• AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h
The OPTION button allows you to access the
PERSONAL OPTIONS menu and customize the
personalization settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Press and hold the RESET button to reset
to 0.0 mph (km/h).
RESET Button
The RESET button, used along with other buttons, will
reset system functions and turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ACTIVE
DIC Warnings and Messages
This message displays when the Antilock Brake
System (ABS) is adjusting brake pressure to help
avoid a braking skid.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct
the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another. You can scroll through the messages that may
have been sent at the same time. The DIC is continuously
updated with the vehicle performance status.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is
displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. The
message stays on for a few seconds after the system
stops adjusting brake pressure. See Antilock Brake
Some messages may not require immediate action,
but you can press the RESET button to acknowledge
that you received the messages and to clear them from
the display.
ACTIVE HANDLING
This message displays when the Active Handling System
is operating. The Active Handling System is a computer
controlled system that assists the driver in controlling the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. You may feel or hear
the system working and see the ACTIVE HANDLING
message displayed in the DIC. This message stays on
for a few seconds following the active handling event.
This is normal when the system is operating. See Active
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACTIVE HANDLING CALIBRATING
ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION
This message displays and the active handling system
light on the instrument panel cluster turns on while the
system is calibrating after exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h)
page 3-41. The Active Handling System is not functional
yet. The Active Handling System performance is affected
until the next message ACTIVE HANDLING READY is
displayed. The Active Handling System is off until the
ACTIVE HANDLING READY message is displayed.
information.
If your vehicle has a power convertible top, this message
displays and a chime sounds if the trunk partition is
not in place. Open the hatch/trunk and make sure the
trunk partition is secure and no objects are on the trunk
more information.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the vehicle has detected
that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
point. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that features are disabled, this message is
displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the
charge in the battery. Turn off unnecessary accessories
to allow the battery to recharge.
ACTIVE HANDLING READY
This message displays when the functional check of
the Active Handling System has been completed.
information.
BUCKLE PASSENGER
ACTIVE HANDLING WARMING UP
This message reminds you to buckle the passenger’s
safety belt.
This message may display when you first start your
vehicle during cold winter weather, and begin to drive
away, up to 6 mph (10 km/h). This is normal. The Active
Handling System performance is affected until the
next message ACTIVE HANDLING READY is displayed
for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is buckled, the
passenger’s safety belt is unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. You
should have the passenger buckle their safety belt.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,
the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag
is enabled. If the passenger’s safety belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
After an oil change, the engine oil life system must
be reset. See “Engine Oil Life” under DIC Operation
for more information.
BUCKLE SEATBELT
This message reminds you to buckle the driver’s
safety belt.
CHECK BRAKE FLUID
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled,
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle
your safety belt.
This message displays, a chime sounds, and the brake
system warning light on the instrument panel cluster
turns on if the ignition is on to inform the driver that the
brake fluid level is low. See Brake System Warning
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. See Brakes
on page 5-42.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is
on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will
be repeated. If the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
This message is an additional reminder to the safety
belt reminder light in the instrument panel cluster.
information.
CHECK COOLANT LEVEL
This message displays when the engine coolant level is
low. Have the cooling system serviced by your dealer/
page 5-28.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK GAS CAP
CLOSE TRUNK TO MOVE TOP
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Check the fuel cap to make sure that it is on
properly. Once tightened, it takes at least one overnight
park to reset or clear this message. If both the CHECK
GAS CAP message and the malfunction indicator lamp in
the instrument panel cluster are on, you may need to see
your dealer/retailer for service. See Malfunction Indicator
This message displays and a chime sounds if the trunk
is open while you are trying to operate the convertible
top. Make sure the trunk is closed before operating the
COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE
This message displays and a short chime sounds when
the Competitive Driving mode is selected. The instrument
panel cluster light will not be on when the Competitive
Driving mode is selected. The Traction Control System
(TCS) will not be operating while in the Competitive
Driving mode. Adjust your driving accordingly. See
more information.
CHECK OIL LEVEL
On some vehicles, this message displays and
two chimes sound if the oil level in the vehicle is low.
Once the vehicle senses a change in the engine
oil level, the light remains off.
If this message appears after starting the engine,
the engine oil level may be too low. You may need
COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE
This message displays and a chime sounds if the engine
coolant exceeds 255°F (124°C). If you have been
operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions,
pull off the road, stop your vehicle, and turn off the
engine as soon as possible.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can monitor the coolant temperature with the gages
button on the DIC or the engine coolant temperature
gage on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine
page 3-42.
ENGINE OVERHEATED – STOP
ENGINE
This message displays and a continuous chime sounds
when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn the
engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears and a chime sounds every
minute until this condition changes. If you do not press
the RESET button, the message remains on until
the condition changes.
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE
ENGINE RPM
This message displays if the engine oil temperature
exceeds 320°F (160°C). Check the engine coolant
temperature and engine oil level. If the engine is too
may need service, so see your dealer/retailer.
CRUISE DISENGAGED
This message displays briefly when you disengage
the cruise control system by stepping on the brake on
an automatic transmission vehicle or the clutch on
a manual transmission vehicle, or by turning off
page 3-11 for more information.
You can monitor the oil temperature with the gages
page 3-50.
Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed.
This message remains displayed and active until the
issue is resolved.
ENGINE DRAG CONTROL ACTIVE
This message displays when engine drag control is
active. When driving in a lower gear in rainy, snowy,
or icy conditions and then letting up on the accelerator
or downshifting, the rear wheels may begin to slip and
this message displays. This message stays on for
a few seconds following the engine drag control event.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
HOT ENGINE AIR CONDITIONING OFF
This message displays if it is dark enough outside and
the headlamps and the Twilight Sentinel® controls
are off. This message informs the driver that turning on
the exterior lamps is recommended. It has become
dark enough outside to require the headlamps and/or
other exterior lamps.
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the A/C
operation automatically resumes. You can continue to
drive your vehicle. If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible to avoid compressor damage.
HIGH TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when one or more of the tires is
over-inflated. This message also displays LEFT FRONT,
RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to
indicate which tire is affected. You can receive more
than one tire pressure message at a time. To read other
messages that may have been sent at the same time,
press the RESET button. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have
the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on
the Tire Loading Information label. See Run-Flat Tires
tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-50.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when the fuel tank is less than
10 percent full and the display is turned off. A multiple
chime also sounds when this message is displayed.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
on page 3-48.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
A message reappears every 10 minutes until the
condition is corrected.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays when one or more of the tires
is under-inflated. This message also displays LEFT
FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR
to indicate which tire is affected. Multiple chimes sound
and the tire pressure light on the instrument panel cluster
turns on when this message is displayed. See Tire
than one tire pressure message at a time. To read other
messages that may have been sent at the same time,
press the RESET button. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have
the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on
the Tire Loading Information label. See Run-Flat Tires
page 3-50.
LOW OIL PRESSURE
This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur.
If this message appears while the engine is running,
stop the engine and do not operate it until the cause
of low oil pressure is corrected. Severe damage to
the engine can result. A multiple chime sounds when
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
{CAUTION:
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
message is displayed on the Driver Information
Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities will
be reduced during severe maneuvers. The
active handling system will be affected. See
drive too fast, you could lose control of your
vehicle. You or others could be injured. Do not
drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE
PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT message is displayed.
Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures
as soon as you can.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
A message reappears every 10 minutes until the
condition is corrected.
MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h)
This message displays when a malfunction is present in
the Selective Ride Control system. The vehicle speed
will be limited to a value determined by the vehicle when
the shock absorber system has failed and the shocks
are in their full soft mode. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes.
• The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as airports,
automatic toll booths, and some gas stations have
EMI fields which may interfere with the keyless
access transmitter.
NO FOBS DETECTED
This message displays if the vehicle does not detect
the presence of a keyless access transmitter when you
have attempted to start the vehicle or a vehicle door
has just closed. The following conditions may cause
this message to appear:
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory
power outlet on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these devices are cell
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving the
keyless access transmitter away from these devices
when starting the vehicle. In addition, PDA devices
and remote garage and gate openers may also
generate Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) that
may interfere with the keyless access transmitter.
Do not carry the keyless access transmitter in the
same pocket or bag as these devices.
If moving the transmitter to different locations within
the vehicle does not help, place the transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons facing
to the right and then press the START button.
• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The battery
voltage must be above 10 volts for the keyless
access transmitter to be detected properly.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO FOB - OFF OR RUN?
PRESS BRAKE TO START ENGINE
(Automatic Transmission Only)
This message displays when the keyless access
transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle while you
are trying to turn the ignition off. Your vehicle may be
near a strong radio antenna signal causing the keyless
access system to be jammed. The vehicle will remain in
ACCESSORY until the vehicle is turned off or is restarted,
or five minutes has expired. If you turn the ignition off and
you cannot find the keyless access transmitter, you will
not be able to restart the vehicle. The keyless access
transmitter needs to be inside of the vehicle in order for
for more information.
This message displays if you try to start the engine
by pressing the keyless ignition start button without
having the brake pressed. The brake needs to be
pressed when starting the engine. See Ignition
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
If this message displays and the check engine light
comes on, a noticeable reduction in the vehicle’s
performance may occur. If the REDUCED ENGINE
POWER message is displayed, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time the
vehicle is driven.
OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE
This message displays for a few seconds if a keyless
access transmitter that is not labelled 1 or 2 is used and
you try to personalize the features on your vehicle by
pressing the OPTION button. The personalization system
will not recognize the transmitter and the DIC will not
display the current driver number or the menus used to
set personalizations. The personalization features will
then be set to the default states. See DIC Vehicle
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
the check engine light stays on, the vehicle should
be taken to your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair. See Malfunction Indicator
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed.
SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every five minutes until this
condition changes.
If this message displays while you are driving, stop as
soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the message stays
on, or comes back on again while you are driving, your
vehicle is in need of service. See your dealer/retailer. If
the antilock brake system (ABS) warning light is on and
the regular brake system warning light is not on, you still
have brakes, but do not have ABS. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you do not have ABS and
there is a problem with the brakes. See Antilock Brake
If the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is
displayed in combination with the COOLANT OVER
TEMPERATURE message, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-31.
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a problem with the
Active Handling System and your vehicle needs service.
The active handling system light on the instrument
panel cluster also turns on and a chime sounds.
See your dealer/retailer. When this message is
displayed, the system is not working. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See Active Handling System
on page 4-7 for more information.
If this message is displayed, the Traction Control
System (TCS) and the Active Handling System will
also be disabled. The DIC will scroll three messages:
SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES, SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM, and SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING, and
the instrument panel cluster lights will come on along
with a chime. When the service message is displayed,
the computer controlled systems will not assist the
driver. Have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible. Adjust your driving accordingly.
SERVICE AIR CONDITIONING
This message displays when the electronic sensors
that control the air conditioning and heating systems
are no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop
in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
To acknowledge these messages, press the
RESET button.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
If this message displays while you are driving, there may
be a problem with the electrical charging system. It could
mean that there is a loose or broken drive belt or that
there is another electrical problem. Have your vehicle
checked right away by your dealer/retailer. Driving while
this message is on could drain the battery.
This message displays when the Selective Ride Control
system has detected a malfunction and the system must
be serviced. See your dealer/retailer. If a fault is present
in the Selective Ride Control system which causes the
shocks to be in their full soft condition, the messages
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVE,
and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h) will display
more information.
If you must drive a short distance with the message on,
be certain to turn off the vehicle’s accessories, such
as the radio and air conditioner.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes.
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-42. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-69 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
This message displays if an electrical problem has
occurred within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM
This message displays if the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) has detected a problem within the fuel system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
This message also displays when the cluster is
not getting fuel information from the PCM.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
SET PARK BRAKE FOR SEAT RECALL
If this message displays when you are driving, there is a
problem with the Traction Control System (TCS) and your
vehicle is in need of service. See your dealer/retailer.
When this message is displayed, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, this message
displays if you try to recall the memory positions when
the ignition is on and the parking brake is not set. If the
vehicle is on, you must set the parking brake in order for
the memory positions to recall. See Memory Seat, Mirrors
The traction control system (TCS) warning light on
the instrument panel cluster will also turn on and
a chime will sound.
SET PARK BRAKE TO MOVE TOP
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, this message
displays and a chime sounds if you try to operate the
power convertible top without first setting the parking
brake. Set the parking brake before trying to operate the
power convertible top. See Convertible Top (Manual)
for more information.
When this message is displayed, the computer controlled
systems will not assist the driver in controlling the vehicle.
Have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
SHIFT TO PARK
This message displays when there is a problem with the
transmission. See your dealer/retailer for service.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, this
message displays if the vehicle is not in PARK (P)
when the engine is being turned off. The vehicle will
be in ACCESSORY Once the shift lever is moved
to PARK (P), the vehicle will turn off.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays and a chime sounds when there
may be an electrical or another system problem with
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer/retailer if this message keeps appearing.
The vehicle will remain in ACCESSORY, without the
20 minute time-out period, until the shift lever is moved
to PARK (P) or until the driver presses the pushbutton
page 2-22 for more information.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SHIFT TO PARK OR SET PARK
BRAKE FOR TOP
TIRE FLAT
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, this
message displays and a chime sounds if you try to
operate the power convertible top without first shifting
into PARK (P) or setting the parking brake. Either shift
the vehicle into PARK (P) or set the parking brake
before trying to operate the power convertible top. See
{CAUTION:
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
message is displayed on the Driver Information
Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities will
be reduced during severe maneuvers. If you
drive too fast, you could lose control of your
vehicle. You or others could be injured. Do not
drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the LOW
TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT message is
displayed. Drive cautiously and check your
tire pressures as soon as you can.
SHOCKS INOPERATIVE
This message displays when a malfunction is present
in the Selective Ride Control system which is causing
the shocks to be in their full soft mode. This is a warning
to the driver that the vehicle handling may be affected.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible.
This message displays when one or more of the tires is
flat. This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
tire is affected. Multiple chimes sound and the tire
pressure light on the instrument panel cluster comes on
when this message is displayed. See Tire Pressure Light
on page 3-42.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message is followed by the MAXIMUM SPEED
55 MPH (90 km/h) message, and then by the REDUCED
HANDLING message. The Active Handling System
will intervene more quickly when a flat tire has been
detected. Adjust your driving accordingly.
TOP MOTOR OVER TEMPERATURE
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the power convertible top button is pressed and the
power convertible top pump motor temperature is over
221°F (105°C). Wait for the power convertible top
pump motor to cool down before using the power
convertible top.
You can receive more than one tire pressure message
at a time. To read other messages that may have been
sent at the same time, press the RESET button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See
also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation
TOP NOT SECURE
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
power convertible top button is released before the
top open or close operation is complete or if the top is
closed without the header latch engaged. Press and
hold the convertible top button to fully open or close the
top, and make sure that the header latch is engaged
after the top is closed.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
A message reappears every 10 minutes until the
condition is corrected.
TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so
adjust your driving accordingly. The message stays on
for a few seconds after the TCS stops limiting wheel
for more information.
TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the power convertible top button is pressed and the
power convertible top pump motor temperature is below
−4°F (−20°C). Wait for the power convertible top pump
motor to warm up before using the power convertible top.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE
HANDLING – OFF
TRACTION SYSTEM – OFF
This message displays and stays on, a single, quick
tone sounds, and the traction control system (TCS)
warning light on the instrument panel cluster turns on
when the TCS is turned off by pressing the Active
Handling System button on the console. See Traction
for more information.
This message displays, the instrument panel cluster
light turns on, and a chime sounds when the Traction
Control System (TCS) and Active Handling System
are turned off by pressing the Active Handling System
button on the console for five seconds. The Antilock
Brake System (ABS) remains on with the TCS and
Active Handling System off. Adjust your driving
for more information.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
TRACTION SYSTEM – ON
To acknowledge this message, press the RESET
button.
This message displays and a single, quick tone sounds
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned
on by pressing the Active Handling System button on
the console. This message automatically clears from
the DIC display on its own. See Traction Control
TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE
HANDLING – ON
If the Traction Control System (TCS) and Active
Handling System are off, this message displays briefly,
the instrument panel cluster light turns off, and a
chime sounds when the TCS and Active Handling
System are turned on by briefly pressing the Active
Handling System button on the console. See Traction
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes. If you do not press the RESET
button, the message remains on the display until
the condition changes.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays and four chimes sound if the
transmission fluid temperature rises above 270°F (132°C)
or rises rapidly. The transmission may shift gears or
apply the torque converter clutch to reduce the fluid
temperature. Driving aggressively or driving on long hills
can cause the transmission fluid temperature to be higher
than normal. If this message appears, you may continue
to drive at a slower speed. Monitor the transmission fluid
temperature and allow it to cool to at least 230°F (110°C).
The transmission fluid temperature can be monitored with
the gages button on the DIC. See DIC Operation and
temperature. If it is also hot, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-31.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km).
Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the off
position.
To acknowledge this message, press the RESET
button.
UNLATCH HEADER TO MOVE TOP
This message displays and a chime sounds if you try
to lower the convertible top without first unlocking
the top. Move the latch handle to unlock the convertible
If this message is displayed during normal vehicle
operation on flat roads, your vehicle may need service.
See your dealer/retailer for an inspection.
If driving in a performance or competitive manner, the
use of (S) Sport Automatic Mode or (S) Sport Manual
Paddle Shift gear selection is recommended. See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-26
for more information.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• INTRUSION SENSOR OFF, if your vehicle has this
feature
Other Messages
Here are more messages that you can receive on your
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a
message and read another message that may have
come on at the same time, press the RESET button.
• INTRUSION SENSOR ON, if your vehicle has this
feature
• KNOWN FOB
• ACCESSORY MODE ON
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
• BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
• MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED
• BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
• CHECK WASHER FLUID
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
• OFF–ACCESSORY TO LEARN
• CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (XXX km/h)
• DRIVER DOOR AJAR
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
• PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
• READY FOR FOB #X
• FOB AUTOLEARN WAIT XX MINUTES
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
• TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible)
• TRUNK AJAR (Convertible)
• UPSHIFT NOW
• FOB BATTERY LOW
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless Access
• HATCH AJAR (Coupe)
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The current driver’s preferences are recalled when one
of the following occurs:
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Many features on your vehicle can be personalized.
This means that the operation of these features can be
set to operate differently depending on who is driving
the vehicle. See “Personal Options” later in this section
for the features that you can personalize.
• The lock or unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter, labelled 1 or 2, is pressed.
• The appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on
the driver’s door is pressed. See Memory Seat,
information.
The personalization settings for other features are
automatically updated and saved as the driver adjusts
them. These include the following settings and presets:
• A valid keyless access transmitter is detected upon
opening the driver’s door.
• The radio presets, tone, volume, fade, balance,
equalization (EQ) settings and source (radio or CD)
If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is
detected upon opening the driver’s door, the driver
preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled.
• The last climate control setting
• The Head-Up Display (HUD) position and dimming
level, if your vehicle has this feature
If a keyless access transmitter that is not labelled 1 or 2
is used, the personalization system will not recognize
the transmitter. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will
not display a current driver number and the features
that are normally programmed through the DIC will be
set to the default states. Also, if the OPTION button
is pressed, the DIC does not display the menus used to
set personalizations, but instead displays OPTIONS
UNAVAILABLE for a few seconds.
• The instrument panel cluster dimming level and last
selected DIC display
Separate personalization settings are saved for
two different drivers. One of the keyless access
transmitters is assigned to driver 1. The other is
assigned to driver 2. The back of the keyless access
transmitters are labelled 1 or 2 to correspond to
each driver.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the Personal Options Menu
Personal Options
To enter the personal options menu, use the
following steps:
The following options are available for programming:
Display Units: This option allows you to choose
the measurement units.
1. If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, turn
the vehicle on with the shift lever in PARK (P).
Press the OPTION button until DISPLAY UNITS appears
on the display, then press the RESET button to scroll
through the following modes:
If you have a manual transmission vehicle, turn the
vehicle on with the parking brake set.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
• ENGLISH (default)
• METRIC
2. Press the OPTION button and you will enter the
PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.
If you choose ENGLISH, all information will be displayed
in English units.
The DIC will display the current driver
number (1 or 2) for a few seconds and then will
display instructions on which buttons to use for
setting the personalizations. The RESET button is
used to select a setting for a particular feature. The
OPTION button is used to move to the next feature.
If you choose METRIC, all information will be displayed
in metric units.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
3. Press the OPTION button while the instruction
screen is displayed to enter the first personalization
menu item.
Auto Memory Recall (Automatic Transmission
only): If your automatic transmission vehicle has the
memory package, you may have this option. This option
allows the driver’s seat, the telescopic steering column,
if your vehicle has this feature, and the outside rearview
mirrors to automatically move to the current driver’s set
position when the engine starts.
4. Once you have cycled through all of the personal
options, pressing the OPTION button a final time
exits the personal options menu. In addition, if
no button is pressed within 45 seconds, the DIC
will exit the personal options menu.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the OPTION button until AUTO MEMORY RECALL
appears on the display, then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes:
In order for the Auto Exit Recall feature to work on an
automatic transmission vehicle, the vehicle must be
in PARK (P). On a manual transmission vehicle,
the parking brake must be set.
• YES
Press the OPTION button until AUTO EXIT RECALL
appears on the display, then press the RESET button
to scroll through the following modes:
• NO (default)
If you choose YES, the driver’s seat, the outside
rearview mirrors and the telescopic steering column,
if your vehicle has this feature, positions are recalled
when you turn the ignition on.
• YES
• NO (default)
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
If you choose YES, when you turn the ignition off and
open the driver’s door or press the unlock button on the
keyless access transmitter, the seat and the telescopic
steering wheel, if your vehicle has this feature, will return
to their stored exit positions for an easy exit or an
easy entrance when returning to the vehicle.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
Auto Exit Recall: If your vehicle has the memory
package, you may have this option. This option allows
the driver’s seat and telescopic steering column, if
your vehicle has this feature, to automatically move
to the current driver’s exit position when one of
the following occurs:
The seat and steering wheel will only return to the
stored driving position if you press the appropriate
memory button or activate the auto memory recall
feature.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
• The vehicle is turned off or in Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) or accessory mode and the driver’s
door is opened.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP and the unlock
button on the keyless access transmitter is pressed.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approach Lights: This option briefly turns on the
parking lamps, the front fog lamps and the back-up
lamps during low light periods when the keyless access
transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
Twilight Delay: This option allows you to set the amount
of time you want the parking lamps and front fog lamps to
remain on after you exit the vehicle. This will occur when
the vehicle is off or in RAP and the headlamps are on due
to the automatic headlamp system. The parking lamps
and front fog lamps will remain on until the driver selected
time expires, the exterior lamp control is activated or the
vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.
Press the OPTION button until APPROACH LIGHTS
appears on the display, then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes:
• OFF
• ON (default)
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
Press the OPTION button until TWILIGHT DELAY
appears on the display, then press the RESET button
to scroll through the following modes:
If you choose ON, the parking lamps, the front fog
lamps, and the back-up lamps will come on for
20 seconds during low light periods when all of the
following occurs:
• OFF
• You press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter.
• 15 S
• 30 S (default)
• Both of the doors are closed.
• The vehicle is off or in RAP.
• 90 S
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
The lamps remain on for 20 seconds or until a door is
opened, the lock button on the keyless access transmitter
is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.
If you choose 15 S, the twilight delay time will be set to
15 seconds.
If you choose 30 S, the twilight delay time will be set to
30 seconds.
information.
If you choose 90 S, the twilight delay time will be set to
90 seconds.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to the
next personal option.
Flash at Lock: This option activates the front and rear
turn signals for one long flash when the lock button
on the keyless access transmitter is pressed. This will
only occur when the vehicle is off. If the lock button
on the keyless access transmitter is pressed again
within five seconds, the horn will sound regardless
of which setting you have selected.
Flash at Unlock: This option activates the front and
rear turn signals for two short flashes when the unlock
or hatch/trunk button on the keyless access transmitter is
pressed. This will only occur when the vehicle is off.
Press the OPTION button until FLASH AT LOCK
appears on the display, then press the RESET button
to scroll through the following modes:
Press the OPTION button until FLASH AT UNLOCK
appears on the display, then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes:
• YES (default)
• NO
• YES (default)
• NO
If you choose YES, the front and rear turn signals will
flash once when you press the lock button on the
keyless access transmitter.
If you choose YES, the front and rear turn signals
will flash twice when you press the unlock button or the
hatch/trunk button on the keyless access transmitter.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOB Reminder: This option chirps the horn three times
when the driver’s door is closed and there is a keyless
access transmitter inside the interior of the vehicle.
This will only occur when the vehicle is off.
For example, if there are two keyless access
transmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, the
other will be locked in. The keyless access transmitter
locked in the vehicle can still be used to start the vehicle
or unlock the doors, if needed. A person approaching
the outside of the locked vehicle without an authorized
keyless access transmitter, however, will not be able
to open the door, even with a transmitter in the vehicle.
Press the OPTION button until FOB REMINDER appears
on the display, then press the RESET button to scroll
through the following modes:
• YES
You may temporarily disable the passive door
• NO (default)
locking feature by pressing the door unlock switch for
three seconds on an open door. Passive door locking will
then remain disabled until a door lock switch is pressed or
until the power mode transitions from the off power mode.
If you choose YES, the horn will chirp three times when
a keyless access transmitter is inside of the vehicle
while the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door
is closed.
Press the OPTION button until PASSIVE DOOR
LOCKING appears on the display, then press the
RESET button to scroll through the following modes:
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
• OFF (default)
• SILENT
• HORN
Passive Door Locking: This option allows you to
select whether the doors automatically lock during
normal vehicle exit. When the ignition is turned off and
all doors become closed, the vehicle will determine
how many keyless access transmitters remain in
the vehicle interior. If at least one keyless access
transmitter has been removed from the interior of
the vehicle, the doors will lock after eight seconds.
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
If you choose SILENT, the doors will automatically lock
eight seconds after you turn the ignition off, remove
a keyless access transmitter from the interior of
the vehicle, and close both doors.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you choose HORN, the doors will automatically lock
and the horn will chirp eight seconds after you turn
the ignition off, remove a keyless access transmitter
from the interior of the vehicle, and close both doors.
If you choose BOTH, both doors will automatically
unlock when you approach and open the driver’s door
with the keyless access transmitter.
Auto Unlock: This option allows you to select whether
the driver’s door, both doors or neither door automatically
unlocks when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P) for
automatic transmission vehicles or when the ignition is
turned off or is in RAP for manual transmission vehicles.
If you are parking in a quiet area and do not want
the horn to sound when the doors lock, press the lock
button on the keyless access transmitter immediately
after removing it from the interior and closing the doors.
This will lock the doors and cancel the passive locking
for this ignition cycle.
Press the OPTION button until AUTO UNLOCK appears
on the display, then press the RESET button to scroll
through the following modes:
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance
to the next personal option.
• OFF
• DRIVER
Passive Door Unlock: This option allows you to
select which doors will automatically unlock when you
approach and open the driver’s door with the keyless
for more information.
• BOTH (default)
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
If you choose DRIVER, on automatic transmission
vehicles, the driver’s door will automatically unlock
when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P). On manual
transmission vehicles, the driver’s door will automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off or is in RAP.
Press the OPTION button until PASSIVE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the display, then press the
RESET button to scroll through the following modes:
• DRIVER (default)
• BOTH
If you choose BOTH, on automatic transmission
vehicles, both doors will automatically unlock when
the shift lever is moved into PARK (P). On manual
transmission vehicles, both doors will automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off or is in RAP.
If you choose DRIVER, only the driver’s door will
automatically unlock when you approach and open
the driver’s door with the keyless access transmitter.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
Language: This option allows you to select the
language the DIC, the Head-Up Display (HUD), if your
vehicle has this feature, and the radio uses to display
messages. Each language mode will be displayed in its
own language. For example, English will be displayed
as ENGLISH, Spanish as ESPANOL, etc. If your vehicle
has the navigation system, you will not have the
Japanese language mode.
Personalize Name: This option allows you to type
in a name or greeting that will appear on the DIC
display whenever the corresponding keyless access
transmitter (1 or 2) is used or one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door is pressed.
Press the OPTION button until PERSONALIZE NAME
appears on the display, then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes:
Press the OPTION button until LANGUAGE appears
on the display, then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes:
• YES
• NO (default)
• ENGLISH (default)
• DEUTSCH (German)
• FRANCAIS (French)
• ITALIANO (Italian)
• ESPANOL (Spanish)
If you choose YES, you can type in a name that will
appear on the DIC display.
To program a name, use the following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu and select
the driver number (1 or 2) that you would like
to program by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Personal
Options Menu”.
If you choose a language that you do not understand,
press the OPTION and RESET buttons for five seconds.
The DIC will begin displaying all of the various languages
one by one for as long as the buttons are pressed. When
the desired language is displayed, release the buttons
and the DIC will set to this language.
2. Press the OPTION button until the PERSONALIZE
NAME option appears on the display.
3. Select YES under PERSONALIZE NAME by
pressing the RESET button.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the OPTION button and a cursor will display
where you can insert a letter.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the name or greeting
you want is complete. After the name or greeting
is complete, keep pressing the RESET button
until the display turns blank and exits out of this
option. You can program up to 20 characters.
5. Press the OPTION button again until the letter you
want is displayed. To scroll through the letters faster
and without a beeping noise, keep the OPTIONS
button depressed. There are alpha/numeric
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
characters and a blank space available.
If a customized name or greeting is not programmed,
the DIC display will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to
correspond with either the number on the back of the
keyless access transmitter (1 or 2) that is being used
or to the memory button (1 or 2) that is pressed.
6. Then press the RESET button to select the letter of
your choice and proceed on to the next space to
the right.
If you make a mistake and would like to clear or
replace a letter, perform the following steps:
PERSONALIZE NAME is the last option available to
program in the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu. Pressing
the OPTION button after this setting will exit you
from the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu. The last item
you were in prior to entering PERSONAL OPTIONS
will then display on the DIC.
6.1. Press the RESET button to reach the letter
you would like to change.
6.2. Press the OPTION button to scroll through
the letter choices.
6.3. Press the RESET button to select the letter
and proceed on to the next space to the right.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While your vehicle is parked:
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment
can be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Time
Radio(s)
With the ignition on and the radio off, press the H or the
M button to enter clock mode. Press and hold H until
the correct hour appears on the display. Press and
hold M until the correct minute appears on the display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press either the H or the M button to enter
the clock mode. Press the tune knob to select between
the 12 or 24 hour display format. The clock mode
automatically times out with the changed display
format set as the current default setting.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD similar
Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system.
An indicator light on the upper left side of the radio
flashes when the ignition is off, to indicate the theft
deterrent feature is set. For more information, see
Your vehicle has seven Bose® amplified speakers.
See your dealer/retailer for details.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Playing the Radio
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system
on and off. Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
4 (Information): For RDS, press to change what
display while using RDS. The display options are station
name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name of
the program (if available).
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming.
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies.
For XM™ (if equipped), press while in XM™ mode to
retrieve four different categories of information related
to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title,
Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
• Display messages from radio stations.
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and works only when the information
is available. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcast
incorrect information that causes the radio features
to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio
station.
To change the default on the display, press until you
see the desired display, then hold for two seconds.
The radio produces one beep and the selected display
is now the default.
AUTO n (Automatic Volume): Automatic volume
automatically adjusts the audio system to make up
for road and wind noise as you drive, by increasing
the volume as vehicle speed increases.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters display. RDS stations can also
provide the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select AUTO VOLUME MIN (minimum), AUTO VOLUME
MED (medium), or AUTO VOLUME MAX (maximum).
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each higher setting provides more volume compensation
at faster vehicle speeds. To turn automatic volume off,
press this until AUTO VOLUME OFF displays.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between AM, XM1 or XM2
(if equipped), FM1, or FM2. The display shows
the selection.
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, it includes
Bose® AudioPilot® noise compensation technology.
When turned on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the
audio system to compensate for background noise, so
that the music always sounds the same at the set volume
level. This feature is most effective at lower radio volume
settings where background noise can affect how well you
hear the music being played. At higher volume settings,
where the music is much louder than the background
noise, there could be little or no adjustments by
AudioPilot®.
To use AudioPilot®, set the radio volume to the desired
level. Turn AudioPilot® on by pressing the automatic
volume button until AVOL ON displays. As the vehicle
goes faster, the background noise increases. AudioPilot®
adjusts the audio system’s sound level to overcome
background noise. To turn AudioPilot® off, press the
automatic volume button until AVOL OFF displays.
For additional information on AudioPilot®, visit
www.bose.com/audiopilot.
O / e (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
t SEEK u: Press the arrows to go to the previous
or to the next station and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
t SCAN u: Press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN displays.
The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes on to the next station. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
four seconds until PRESET SCAN displays. The radio
goes to the next preset station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next preset station. Press either arrow
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
MUTE: Press to silence the system. Press again to turn
the sound on.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal that are
in the selected band.
This button is not available on the Radio with
Six-Disc CD.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six AM, six XM1 and six XM2
(if equipped), six FM1, and six FM2), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
O / e (Bass/Treble): Press to select BASS or
TREBLE. Turn to increase or to decrease the tone.
If a station is weak or has static, decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,
press and hold when the tone control is on the display.
The level changes to the middle position.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, XM1 or XM2
(if equipped), FM1, or FM2.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold when no tone or speaker control
is displayed. AUDIO SETTINGS CENTERED displays.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station that
was set, returns and the equalization that was
selected is stored for that pushbutton.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to
select customized equalization settings designed for
classical, pop, rock, jazz, talk, and country. Selecting
CUSTOM or changing bass or treble, returns the EQ
to the manual bass and treble settings.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
If the radio has the Bose® audio system, the equalization
settings are EQ1 through EQ6 and CUSTOM.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Once the desired category displays, press either
SEEK arrow to go to a category’s station. SEEKING
CATEGORY displays.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
O / e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press until
BALANCE displays. Turn to move the sound toward the
right or the left speakers.
4. To go to another station within that category, press
the CAT button to display the category, then press
either SEEK arrow to go to another station.
If both category and traffic are on, the radio searches
for stations with the selected category and traffic
announcements.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press until FADE displays. Turn to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NONE
displays and the radio returns to the last station tuned.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
press and hold when the speaker control is on the
display. The level changes to the middle position.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a category by
performing the following:
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold when no tone or speaker control
is displayed. AUDIO SETTINGS CENTERED displays.
1. Press the CAT button. The last selected category
displays.
2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.
Finding a Category Station
(RDS and XM™ (if equipped))
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow until a beep sounds and
SCAN CATEGORY displays. The radio begins
scanning the stations in the category.
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
1. Press the CAT (category) button. The last selected
category displays.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.
If both category and TRAF (traffic) are on, the radio
scans for stations with the selected category and traffic
announcements.
2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRAF (Traffic): If TA (traffic) displays, the tuned
station broadcasts traffic announcements. When a
traffic announcement is broadcast on this station,
you will hear it.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! displays. The announcement is
heard, even if the volume is low or a CD is playing.
If a CD is playing, play stops during the announcement.
Alert announcements cannot be turned off.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio seeks to a station
that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio stops seeking
and TA displays. If no station is found that broadcasts
traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC INFO displays.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
If TA is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn off
the traffic announcements.
4 (Information): If the current station has a message,
INFO (information) displays. Press to see the message.
The message can display the artist, song title, call in
phone numbers, etc.
The radio plays the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD if the
last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To scroll through
the message, press and release this button. A new group
of words display after every press of the button. Once the
complete message has displayed, INFO disappears from
the display until another new message is received. The
last message can be displayed by pressing this button.
The last message until a new message is received or the
radio is tuned to a different station.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO displays.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Messages
With XM™ Satellite Radio Service, the radio can display
screen messages pertaining to the XM™ radio service,
software and hardware. See XM Radio Messages
on page 3-100 later in this section for further detail.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If CAL ERR displays, it means that the radio has
not been configured properly for your vehicle and
must be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
LOCKED: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the
vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing
if the radio is on, or if the radio is off and the vehicle
is running or in accessory mode.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
When a CD is inserted, CD and the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CDs
Care of Your CD Player
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s)
in their original cases or other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is
made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and the
loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
1. Press and hold the M button for two seconds.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Two beeps sound and LOAD ALL DISCS displays.
2. When INSERT CD # displays, load a CD and
insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player pulls the CD in.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
Once the CD is loaded, wait for INSERT CD # to
display, then load the next CD. The CD player takes
up to six CDs.
M (Load): Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the M button to cancel the loading function.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the M button.
The radio begins to play the last CD loaded.
2. When INSERT CD # displays, load a CD and
insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player pulls the CD in.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD displays.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
Do not repeatedly press the X button to eject a CD
after you have tried to push it in manually. The player’s
25-second eject timer resets at each press of eject,
causing the player not to eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
For every CD loaded, a number displays. To play a
specific CD press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
O / e (Tune): Turn to go to the next or previous
track.
X (Eject): Press to eject CD(s).
{ (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse within the
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
current track.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold for two seconds.
A beep sounds and EJECT ALL displays.
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold to fast forward
through the current track.
RDM (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM DISC PLAY
displays.
2. When REMOVE DISC displays, the CD ejects and
can be removed.
RDM (Random) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player):
Press to hear the tracks in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD or all of the loaded CDs.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the M or
the X button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD is
automatically pulled back into the player. If the CD
is pushed back into the player, before the 25 second
time period is complete, the player senses an error and
tries to eject the CD several times before stopping.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use random, do one of the following:
X (Eject): Press to eject the CD. EJECT can be
activated with either the ignition or radio off.
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to
in random order, press and release until RANDOM
DISC PLAY displays. Once all tracks on this disc
have played, RANDOM DISC PLAY will repeat.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the start of the
next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more
than once, the player continues moving backward
or forward through the CD.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded in
random order, press and release until RANDOM ALL
DISCS displays.
To turn off random play, press and release the
RDM button until RANDOM OFF displays.
t SCAN u: To scan one CD, press and hold either
arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN displays and
a beep sounds. The radio goes to the next track, plays for
10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press either
arrow again, to stop scanning.
RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a track over again.
REPEAT displays.
RPT (Repeat) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player): Press
to hear a track or an entire CD over again.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until CD SCAN displays and a
beep sounds. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of
the first track of each loaded CD. Press either arrow
again, to stop scanning.
To use repeat, do one of the following:
• To repeat a track, press and release until REPEAT
displays.
• To repeat an entire CD, press and release until
REPEAT ONE DISC displays.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to
select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization is stored when a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
To turn off repeated play, press and release the
RPT button until REPEAT OFF displays.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD(s) remains inside the radio
for future listening.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the right SEEK arrow or
turn the O / e (tune) knob to locate the track to
be saved. The track begins to play.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listening
to the radio. CD displays when a CD is in the player.
If your system has a remote playback device, pressing
this button a second time allows the remote device
to play.
4. Press and hold the R button to save the
track into memory. When song list is pressed,
one beep sounds. ADDED SONG displays.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
SONGLIST FULL displays if you try to save more
than 20 selections.
Vehicles with the MP3 feature has the capability of
playing an MP3 CD-R disc. For more information on
how to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3
on page 3-96 later in this section.
To play the song list, press the R button. The recorded
tracks begins to play in the order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK arrows.
Seeking past the last saved track returns to the first
saved track.
Using R (Song List) Mode
(Single CD, MP3, and Six-Disc CD)
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD.
2. Press the R button to turn song list on. S-LIST
displays.
2. Check to see that the CD player is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not display. If S-LIST displays,
3. Press either SEEK arrow or turn the O / e knob
to select the desired track to be deleted.
press the R (song list) button to turn it off.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press and hold the R button for two seconds.
Release the button when SONG REMOVED
displays.
CD Messages
CHECK CD OR CD READ ERROR: If this message
displays and/or the CD comes out, it could be for
one of the following reasons:
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks
are moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track is added to the end of the list.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
1. Turn the CD player on.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
2. Press the R button to turn song list on. S-LIST
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
displays.
3. Press and hold this button for more than four
seconds. One beep sounds and SONGLIST EMPTY
displays indicating the song list has been deleted.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the
song list again are added to the bottom of the list.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
To end song list mode, press the R button. One beep
sounds and S-LIST is removed from the display.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
might need to be made from the portable device.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located
on the right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such as an
iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, etc.
can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use
as another source for audio listening.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or
turn it off.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
a portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
connected, AUX INPUT DEVICE displays. If a portable
audio player is not connected, AUX INPUT DEVICE
does not display.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, the radio displays AUX
INPUT DEVICE and begins playing audio from
that device.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names
could use more disc memory space than necessary.
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of
the file, folder, or playlist names. An MP3 CD that was
recorded using no file folders can also be played. The
system can support up to 11 folders in depth, though,
keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order to
keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback. If a CD
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player
lets you access and navigate up to the maximum,
but all items over the maximum are ignored.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,
other file extensions might not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory is
displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory
folders. However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using
one folder for each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.
• Do not use CD-RW discs.
• Do not use colored discs.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file
structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
Tracks are played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
No Folder
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
begins from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have played,
play continues from files according to their numerical
listing. After playing the last track from the last folder,
play begins again at the first track of the first folder or
root directory.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions will not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
searches playlists (Px) first and then goes to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of
the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
See the information button later in this section for
more information. The new track name displays.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File System and Naming
O / e (Tune): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
go to the next or previous track.
The song name that is displayed is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
{ (Previous Folder): Press to go to the first track in
the previous folder. Press and hold to reverse through
the current track.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
| (Next Folder): Press to go to the first track in
the next folder. Press and hold to fast forward the
current track.
Preprogrammed Playlists
RDM (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD, one folder,
or all of the loaded CDs.
Preprogrammed playlists that were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD in random order,
press and release until RANDOM DISC PLAY
displays.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CD
should begin playing and the CD symbol displays.
• To play the tracks in the folder in random order,
press and release until RANDOM FOLDER
displays.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD-R starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and release until RANDOM
ALL DISCS displays.
To turn off random play, press and release the RDM
button until RANDOM OFF displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a track, CD, or a folder
over again.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the CD.
To use repeat, do one of the following:
• To repeat a track, press and release until REPEAT
displays.
4 (Information): Press to display the artist name and
album contained in the ID3 tag.
• To repeat a CD, press and release until REPEAT
ONE DISC displays.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
• To repeat a folder, press and release until REPEAT
FOLDER displays.
To turn off repeated play, press and release the RPT
button until REPEAT OFF displays.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD is
loaded.
MUTE: Press to silence the system. Press again to turn
the sound on.
Y (Eject): Press to eject a CD. Eject can activated
with either the ignition or radio off.
This button is not available on the Radio with
Six-Disc CD.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Info: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Not Found: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being
updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
XM Locked: The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
No Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When you move into an open area, the signal
should return.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates
with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune to another channel.
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, your receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer. If this message
does not clear within a short period of time, your receiver
could have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation/Radio System
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
If your vehicle has this
feature, some audio
controls can be adjusted at
the steering wheel. They
include the following:
The navigation system has built-in features intended
to minimize driver distraction. Technology alone,
no matter how advanced, can never replace your
own judgment. See the Navigation System manual for
some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle,
it will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
x w (Next/Previous): Press the down or up arrow
to go to the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio only seeks stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Your radio has a blinking indicator light located on the
upper left side of the radio. The indicator light is used to
show that the theft-deterrent feature mode is set. The
blinking indicator light will only flash when the ignition is
in the off position.
To scan stations, press and hold either the down or
up arrow for two seconds until SCAN displays and
a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for
a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press
either the down or up arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan presets, press and hold either the down or up
arrow for four seconds until PRESET SCAN displays
and a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the next station.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press either the down or up arrow again to stop
scanning.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
When a CD is playing, press the down or up arrow to
go to the next or to the previous track.
To scan the current CD, press and hold either the down
or up arrow for more than two seconds. The CD goes
to the next track, plays the first 10 seconds, then goes
to the next track. Press either the down or up arrow
again to stop scanning.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduces these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and hold either
the down or up arrow for more than four seconds.
The CD goes to the next CD, plays the first 10 seconds
of each track, then goes to the next CD. Press either
the down or up arrow again to stop scanning.
+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
increase or to decrease the volume.
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio only seeks preset stations
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or
hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound
to fade in and out.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Diversity Antenna System
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause the loss of XM™
signal for a period of time. The radio may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate interference.
The AM-FM antenna is a hidden self tuning system.
It optimizes the AM and FM signals relative to the
vehicle’s position and radio station source.
No maintenance or adjustments are needed.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
If your vehicle has the XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
it will have an XM™ Satellite Radio antenna. This type
of antenna is located on the roof or on the trunk lid
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive
after drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride
with a driver who has been drinking. Ride
home in a cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S.
state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Under certain weather or operating conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal, or other noise might
be heard with your vehicle’s performance braking
system. This brake system is designed for superior fade
resistance and consistent operation using high
performance brake pads. Brake noise is normal and
does not affect system performance.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes if
that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear
a motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedal
move a little during a stop, but this is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM message and
the TCS warning light will
come on to let you
know if there is a problem
with your TCS system.
See DIC Warnings
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In
many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
and Messages on
page 3-55.
Your vehicle has a traction control system called TCS
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that the rear wheels are spinning too much or are
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the rear brakes and reduces engine power
(by closing the throttle and managing engine spark) to
limit wheel spin.
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
message are on, the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
The TCS system automatically comes on whenever you
start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, you should always leave the
system on. But you can turn the TCS system off if
you ever need to.
The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE message displays on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the TCS
system is limiting wheel spin. See DIC Warnings and
system working, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS system
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you
to safely use it again, you may re-engage the cruise
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the system off,
press the button located
on the console.
Active Handling System
The Active Handling System is a computer controlled
system that helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the
vehicle’s brakes.
When you first start your vehicle during cold winter
weather and begin to drive away, the message ACTIVE
HANDLING WARMING UP may be displayed in the
DIC. This is normal. You can acknowledge this message
by pressing the RESET button. The Active Handling
System performance is affected until the message,
ACTIVE HANDLING READY, is displayed in the DIC.
You can turn the system on or off at any time by
pressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button. The DIC will
display the appropriate message when you push
the button.
The ACTIVE HANDLING CALIBRATING message may
be displayed in the DIC and the instrument panel
cluster light will be on after exceeding 18 mph (30 km/h)
for 10 seconds. The Active Handling System is off
until the ACTIVE HANDLING READY message
is displayed. This could take up to 15 minutes.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the rear
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not
attempt to shift when the rear wheels do not have
traction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is
not covered. See your warranty book for additional
information.
The ACTIVE HANDLING message will come on when
the system is operating. See DIC Warnings and
also feel or hear the system working. This is normal.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The SERVICE ACTIVE
HANDLING SYSTEM
message will be displayed,
the instrument cluster
light will come on, and a
chime will sound to let you
know if there is a
To turn the system off,
press the ACTIVE
HANDLING button on the
console for five seconds.
You can turn the
system on at any time by
pressing the button.
The DIC will display the
appropriate message when
you push the button.
problem with the system.
more information.
If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system detects a flat
tire and the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays
TIRE FLAT, or if the TPM system is malfunctioning and
the DIC displays SERVICE TIRE MONITOR, the
Active Handling System will be affected as follows:
When this light and the SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING
SYSTEM message are on, the system is not
operational. Adjust your driving accordingly.
• The Active Handling System cannot be turned off by
the driver.
The Active Handling System comes on automatically
whenever you start your vehicle. To help maintain
directional control of the vehicle, you should always
leave the system on. You can turn the system off if you
ever need to. If you turn the Active Handling System
off, the Traction Control System will also be turned off.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
• If the Active Handling System is off, it will be turned
on automatically.
• Competitive Driving Mode is unavailable.
• The Active Handling System will feel different in
aiding and maintaining directional control.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the rear
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not
attempt to shift when the rear wheels do not have
traction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is
not covered. See your warranty book for additional
information.
Competitive Driving Mode
The driver can select this optional handling mode by
pressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button on the console
two times within a five second time period.
COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE will be displayed in the
DIC. Competitive Driving Mode allows the driver to have
full control of the rear wheels while the Active Handling
System helps maintain directional control of the vehicle
by selective brake application. This involves less
intervention than with both the Active Handling System
and Traction Control Systems on. The instrument cluster
light will not be on. The Traction Control System will not
be operating. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when one of
the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, this
feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the
vehicle.
When you press the ACTIVE HANDLING button again,
or press the Acc. button, the Active Handling and
Traction Control Systems will be on. The TRACTION
SYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLING-ON message will be
displayed temporarily in the DIC and a chime will be
heard.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOUR: Use for normal city and highway driving. This
setting provides a smooth, soft ride.
Selective Ride Control
You may have a ride control system on your vehicle
called Magnetic Selective Ride Control. The system
provides the following performance benefits:
SPORT: Use where road conditions or personal
preference demand more control. This setting provides
more “feel”, or response to the road conditions.
• Reduced Impact Harshness
• Improved Road Isolation
You can select a setting at any time. Based on road
conditions, steering wheel angle and your vehicle speed,
the system automatically adjusts to provide the best
ride and handling. Select a new setting whenever driving
conditions change.
• Improved High-Speed Stability
• Improved Handling Response
• Better Control of Body Ride Motions
Three Driver Information Center (DIC) messages
(SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVE
and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 KM/H) display
when a malfunction occurs with the Selective Ride
Control system. Refer to DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-55 for more information.
This knob is located on the
center console. Turn it to
select the suspension
of your choice.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist
Steering
Your vehicle has a steering system that continuously
adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle
speeds. It provides ease when parking, yet a firm, solid
feel at highway speeds.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Steering Tips
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the front
wheels are straight ahead.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles with the Z51 performance package have
greaseable outer ends on both of the rear toe-links.
Under normal use, lubrication should be performed as
described in the maintenance schedule. See Scheduled
racing, lubrication should be performed at the end of
each racing day. See your dealer/retailer for lubrication
and make sure any needed repairs are made at
once. Proper procedures for performing these services
can be found in the service manual. See Service
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
racing or other competitive driving.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for racing or other
competitive driving, the engine may use more
oil than it would with normal use. Low oil levels can
damage the engine. For information on how to
Z06 Only: Be sure to check the oil level often during
racing or other competitive driving and keep the
level at or near the upper mark that shows the
proper operating range on the engine oil dipstick.
Except Z06: Be sure to check the oil level often
during racing or other competitive driving and keep
the level at or near 1 quart (1 L) above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range on the
engine oil dipstick. After the competitive driving,
remove excess oil so that the level on the dipstick is
not above the upper mark that shows the proper
operating range.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase. A
Driving at Night
50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION:
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-58.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
Hill and Mountain Roads
up-to-date maps?
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{CAUTION:
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
{CAUTION:
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving On Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle
has a traction control system, slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. Under certain conditions,
you might want to turn the traction control system
off, such as when driving through deep snow and loose
gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lower
page 4-6. The Active Handling System might also
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you
are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Turn the traction
control system off. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-6. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. For a manual transmission, shift
slowly between either FIRST (1) or SECOND (2)
and REVERSE (R), allowing the wheels to stop before
shifting into gear. To prevent transmission wear,
wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does
not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If your vehicle does need to be
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification
label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information on tires and inflation see
page 5-66.
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axle. See “Certification Label” later in this
section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)
of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you
will find the label attached below the door
latch. This label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended
to tow a trailer.
Example 1
Description
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
A
400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 1 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
B
C
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
A
400 lbs (181 kg)
A
400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
B
C
400 lbs (181 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages or anything else — they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they
will keep going.
Do not load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry. See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this section.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing
{CAUTION:
Towing Your Vehicle
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your vehicle
may cause damage because of reduced ground
clearance. Always put your vehicle on a flatbed truck.
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended to be
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. If your
vehicle must be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle”
earlier in this section.
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow a
trailer.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code W),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced,
and you might notice a slight audible knocking
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
noise, commonly referred to as spark knock. If the
octane is less than 87, you might notice a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you could damage the engine. If
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind
noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the 7.0L V8 engine (VIN Code E),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. For best performance, use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 93. In an emergency, you can use regular unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or higher. If
87 octane fuel is used, do not perform any aggressive
driving maneuvers such as wide open throttle
applications. You might also hear audible spark knock
during acceleration. Refill the tank with premium fuel as
soon as possible to avoid damaging the engine. If
you are using gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help
keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if
your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors
or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer/retailer has
additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-43. If this occurs, return to your authorized
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
might not be covered by your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fuel door release
button is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
Push the button to release
the fuel door.
There is also a manual
fuel door release tab. It is
located against the
upper trim in the rear
compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
Pull the tab to release
the fuel door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While refueling, let the cap hang by the tether below the
fuel fill opening.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
{CAUTION:
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly
burned.This spray can happen if your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any
hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all
the way.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-55 for more information.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You
can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-43.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located
inside the vehicle
below the instrument
panel on the
driver’s side.
2. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on the rear
edge of the hood, near the windshield.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then, just pull the hood down and
close it firmly.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir (If Equipped).
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-41.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
J. Passenger Compartment Air Filter (Out of View).
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the 7.0L LS7 V8 engine and you are facing the driver’s side of the vehicle, when you open the
hood, here is what you will see:
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil (Except Z06)
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on, check the engine
oil level right away. For more information, see Driver
check the engine oil level regularly; this is an added
reminder.
on page 5-45.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the
oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level
ground.
F. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See “Changing Engine
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-41.
J. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a lint-free
paper towel or a cloth, then push it back in all
the way.
3. Remove the dipstick again, keeping the tip down
and read the level on the cross-hatched area. Oil
levels that fall in the cross-hatched area are normal.
4. Push the dipstick back in all the way.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the
When to Add Engine Oil (Except Z06)
engine oil fill cap.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
for additional information on engine oil.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z06 models have a racetrack-ready dry sump engine
lubrication system. This high-performance system
operates differently than a standard engine lubrication
system and requires a special procedure when checking
the engine oil level. Follow this procedure closely
when checking the engine oil level.
Checking Engine Oil (Z06 Only)
The engine oil level must be checked when the engine
is warm. Cold oil level in the dry sump tank may not
indicate the actual amount of oil in the system. With this
system, engine oil is contained in an external tank,
separate from the engine. Under normal operating
conditions, the oil pan under the engine does not store
any oil. If the vehicle has been parked for an extended
period without the engine being started, some oil
will seep back into the oil pan, reducing the amount of
oil held in the dry sump tank and there could be no
engine oil at all showing on the dipstick. This is normal
since the dipstick is designed to read engine oil level
only after the engine has run long enough to reach
normal operating temperature. Do not add engine oil
based on cold engine dipstick readings. The engine oil
level on the dipstick will also be inaccurate if checked
while the engine is running.
A. Engine Oil Dipstick
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the
oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level
ground.
1. To obtain an accurate engine oil level reading,
warm up the engine to at least 175°F (80°C).
Cold oil will not give a correct oil level reading.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. The
dipstick is located on the dry sump engine oil tank. See
location of the dry sump engine oil tank.
2. Once the engine is warm, turn off the engine.
Checking the oil while the engine is running
will result in an incorrect oil level reading.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Wait at least five minutes (but not more than
20 minutes) to allow oil to drain and settle in
the engine.
for additional information on engine oil.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
4. Remove the dipstick from the external engine oil
tank and clean it with a lint-free paper towel or a
cloth. Re-insert the dipstick into the external oil tank,
pushing it all the way in until it stops.
the location of the
external engine oil tank
and fill cap.
5. Remove the dipstick from the oil tank and read the
level on the cross-hatched area. Oil levels that fall
in the cross-hatched area are normal.
When to Add Engine Oil (Z06 Only)
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back into the oil tank when you are through.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil through the oil fill cap opening in the
oil tank. This section explains what kind of oil to
use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Remove the two engine oil drain plugs from the
bottom of the engine oil pan. One drain plug
drains the external oil tank via the oil transfer supply
line. The other drain plug drains residual oil from
the crankcase sump. Allow the oil to drain.
Changing Engine Oil and Filter
(Z06 Only)
Z06 models have a racetrack-ready dry sump engine
lubrication system. This high-performance system
operates differently than a standard engine lubrication
system and requires a special procedure when changing
the engine oil and filter. Follow this procedure closely
when changing the engine oil and filter.
2. Once the oil has been drained from the engine,
remove the engine oil filter and allow the oil to
drain.
3. Re-install both drain plugs and tighten them to
18 lb ft (25 Y).
4. Replace the oil filter and tighten it to 18 lb ft
page 6-13 for the correct filter.
5. Oil is filled through the opening in the top of the
external engine oil tank. Remove the oil fill cap.
6. Add eight quarts (7.6 L) of oil to the oil tank. See
7. Install the oil fill cap and insert the dipstick, if
removed.
8. Start the engine and let it run at idle for at least
15 seconds. This will circulate the fresh engine
oil through the lubrication system.
9. Shut off the engine and check the oil level as
described under “Checking Engine Oil (Z06 Only).”
A. Engine Oil Drain Plugs
B. Seals
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for three things:
• GM4718M
Look for this on the oil container, and use only those
oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard
GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on the front of
the oil container.
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
Look for and use only an oil that meets GM
Standard GM4718M.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for
your vehicle.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol
at all temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM
Standard GM4718M should not be used for an
oil change.
Z06 models have a racetrack-ready dry sump engine
lubrication system. This high-performance system
operates differently than a standard engine lubrication
system and requires a special procedure when changing
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come
on. Change the oil as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important
to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper
level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM4718M are all you need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to
change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change the oil prior
to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on,
reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message after an
oil change:
1. Press the TRIP button so the OIL LIFE percentage
is displayed.
2. Press RESET and hold for two seconds. OIL LIFE
REMAINING 100% will appear.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are cleaning your vehicle with the hood open,
take care not to spray water directly near the filter
opening of the air cleaner, as shown in the illustration,
as this could damage your vehicle’s engine.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filters.
Notice: If you spray water into the engine air
cleaner/filter intake and water enters the engine air
cleaner/filter housing, you could damage your
vehicle’s engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not spray water into the
engine air cleaner/filter intake and/or housing.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filters
Inspect the air cleaner/filters at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace them at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filters at each engine oil change.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filters
4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to replace the air
cleaner/filter cover.
To inspect the air cleaner/filters, remove the filters from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filters to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filters remain caked with dirt,
new filters are required.
{CAUTION:
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filters, do
the following:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air cleaner/
filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
1. Remove the screws holding the filter element in
place.
2. Pull on latches found on either side of the filter.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer/retailer service department and have it repaired
as soon as possible.
Manual Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission
fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer/retailer service department and have it repaired
as soon as possible. See Recommended Fluids
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is
difficult, you should have this done at the dealer/retailer
service department. Contact your dealer/retailer for
additional information or the procedure can be found in
the service manual. To purchase a service manual,
page 7-16.
Hydraulic Clutch
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding
fluid will not correct a leak.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Check and What to Use
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
on page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-31.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid to use.
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Make sure the fluid level is at the MIN (Minimum) line
on the side of the reservoir. If it is not, remove the
cap and add the proper fluid until the level reaches the
MIN line.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant surge
tank is located toward the
rear of the engine
compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
Overview on page 5-14
for more information
on location.
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark. The FULL COLD mark is on the front
of the coolant surge tank. Do not overfill the surge tank.
Too much coolant can result in an overflow when the
fluid is hot.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on the
instrument panel cluster and a COOLANT OVER
TEMPERATURE message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Engine Coolant Temperature
on page 3-55 for more information.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait
until there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
to a safe place in an emergency.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
messages COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE and
REDUCED ENGINE POWER are displayed, along with
the Check Engine light, an overheat protection mode
which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent
engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss
in power and engine performance. This operating mode
allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency; you may drive up to 50 miles (80 km).
If the warning continues and you are not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in
this section.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
page 5-17.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark on
the front of the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-33 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. If
the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If
it is not, your vehicle needs service.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark
on the front of the coolant surge tank, add a
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one-quarter turn and
then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
until the level inside stabilizes at the FULL COLD
mark on the front of the surge tank.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level stabilizes at the FULL COLD mark
on the coolant surge tank.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
Check the level in the surge tank when the system
has cooled down. If the coolant is not at the
proper level, repeat Steps 1 through 4, then reinstall
the pressure cap. If the coolant is not at the
proper level when the system cools down again,
see your dealer/retailer.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
Power Steering Fluid
1. Turn the ignition off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
reservoir location.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick. There are markings on both sides of
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the mark.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the engine
What to Use
compartment is hot, the
level should be at the HOT
mark. When the engine
compartment is cool,
the level should be at the
FULL COLD mark.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the
{CAUTION:
reservoir.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If
it is, you should have the brake hydraulic system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes
will not work well.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Brake Fluid
The brake fluid can be checked without taking off the
cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it is
not, have the brake hydraulic system checked to
see if there is a leak.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
What to Add
Notice:
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Pedal Travel
Brake Wear
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Brake Adjustment
As you make brake stops, the disc brakes automatically
adjust for wear.
{CAUTION:
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-46 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or the
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
page 2-17.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your
vehicle, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle charger. This will
help maintain the charge of the battery over an extended
period of time.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you try to start your vehicle by pushing
or pulling it, you could damage your vehicle. Do not
push or pull your vehicle to start it; instead, use
the jump starting procedure in this manual to start
your vehicle when the battery has run down.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brakes.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on each vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal (A)
and a remote negative (−) terminal (B), as shown
in the illustration, which should be used to jump start
your vehicle.
The remote positive (+) terminal (A) can be
accessed by opening the cover of the engine
compartment fuse block.
The remote negative (−) terminal (B) is located
underneath the engine cover, below the engine oil
fill cap.
for the location of the engine compartment fuse
block and engine oil fill cap.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will not need to access the battery for jump
starting. The remote terminals are for that purpose.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal
for this purpose.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the engine fuse block cover to its original
position.
6. You may also need to initialize the power windows.
See “Power Window Initialize” under Power
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
What to Use
To add lubricant when the level is low, use
SAE 75W–90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115. To completely refill after
draining, add Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, in Canada 992694). See
Then fill to the bottom of the filler plug hole with
the Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
How to Check Lubricant
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Halogen Bulbs
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
{CAUTION:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
service them.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s
HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice
that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace a high-beam or front parking/turn signal/DRL
bulb, do the following:
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps
1. Turn the wheel to allow access to the wheel well.
A. High-beam Headlamp
B. Low-beam Headlamp
C. Front Parking/Turn Signal/Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
If the low-beam headlamp needs to be replaced, you
will need to see your dealer/retailer. See High Intensity
information.
2. Access the high-beam or front parking/turn signal
bulbs by removing the access panel. To do this,
remove the three outer fasteners and move
the cover back.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the outer cover to expose the high-beam
headlamp bulb socket once the access cover has
been removed.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
To replace a stoplamp, taillamp/turn signal bulb:
4. Remove the headlamp
bulb by releasing the
outer tabs from
1. Remove the screw from the top of the lamp
assembly.
the socket.
5. Remove the front parking/turn signal bulb by turning
the bulb socket counterclockwise.
6. Replace the high-beam headlamp bulb with a new
bulb and reattach to the bulb socket.
Replace the front parking/turn signal bulb by turning
the bulb socket clockwise.
7. Reverse the Steps 2 through 4 to reinstall.
2. Tilt the lamp assembly toward you.
3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and pull it out.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the
socket.
Windshield Replacement
Your windshield is part of the Head-Up Display (HUD)
system. If you ever have to get your windshield
replaced, get one that is designed for HUD or your HUD
image may look out of focus.
5. Push the new bulb in the bulb socket until it snaps
into place.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly by first lining up the
tabs on the bottom of the lamp assembly with the
tabs in the vehicle, then slide it in.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information.
7. Replace the screw at the top of the lamp assembly.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Front Parking/Turn Signal/
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type and
page 6-13.
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
5702KA
H9
W3W
Headlamp, High-Beam Lamp
Sidemarker Lamp
Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
Signal Lamp
It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly every six months.
3057KX
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade arm to touch the windshield.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
3. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab (C). Pull down on the blade assembly (A) to
release it from the wiper arm hook (F).
1. Open the hood to gain access to the windshield
wipers.
4. Remove the insert from the blade assembly (A).
The insert has two notches at one end that are
locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly.
At the notch end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
2. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To install the new wiper insert:
4. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
Installation guide:
1. Slide the insert (D), notched end last, into the end
with the two blade claws (A). Slide the insert all the
way through the blade claws at the opposite
end (B). Plastic caps (C) will be forced off as the
insert is fully installed.
A. Claw in Notch
2. Be sure the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
3. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
{CAUTION:
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
• Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
Winter Tires
The original equipment tires on your vehicle are
classified as low-profile performance tires.
These tires are designed for very responsive
driving on wet or dry pavement. You may
also notice more road noise with low-profile tires
and that they tend to wear faster.
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb. Your
vehicle warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range,
and speed rating as the original equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The example below shows a typical
passenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction and temperature resistance. For more
page 5-75.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high
as it is wide.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel
in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter
P as the first character in the tire size means
a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-66.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-24.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 5-72.
Run-Flat Tires
Your vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. There is no
spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and no place
to store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat tires perform
so well without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire has
lost pressure.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s
handling capabilities will be reduced during
severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Do not drive over
55 mph (90 km/h) when the low tire warning
light is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the side
of the road to change the tire. You can just keep on
driving. The shorter the distance you drive and the
slower the speed, the greater the chance that the tire
will not have to be replaced. If you drive on a deflated
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
run-flat tire for 25 miles (40 km) or less and at speeds of
55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance that
the tire can be repaired. The tire can operate effectively
with no air pressure for up to 100 miles (160 km) at
speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would then
have to be replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it
provides a cushion between the road and the wheel.
Because you will not have this cushion when driving on
a deflated tire, try to avoid potholes that could damage
your wheel and require replacement of it.
{CAUTION:
Run-flat tires are constructed differently than
other tires and could explode during improper
service. You or others could be injured or
killed if you attempt to repair, replace,
dismount, or mount a run-flat tire. Let only an
authorized run-flat service center repair,
replace, dismount, and mount run-flat tires.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you have
driven on the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire
has been damaged, or if you have driven any distance
on a run-flat tire, check with an authorized run-flat
tire service center to determine whether the tire can be
repaired or should be replaced. To maintain your
vehicle’s run-flat feature, all replacement tires must be
self-supporting tires. As soon as possible, contact
the nearest authorized GM or run-flat servicing facility
for inspection and repair or replacement. To locate
the nearest GM or run-flat servicing facility, call
Roadside Assistance. For phone numbers and Roadside
page 7-8.
The valve stems on your run-flat tires have sensors that
are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
sensors contain batteries which are designed to last
for 10 years under normal driving conditions. See your
dealer/retailer if you ever need to have a wheel
replaced, or if the sensors ever need replacement.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
CAUTION: (Continued)
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
If you will be driving your vehicle at speeds of 175 mph
(282 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa), whichever
is lower. See the example following. When you end this
high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Racing or other competitive driving may affect the
warranty coverage of your vehicle. See your warranty
booklet for more information.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
for additional information.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly on your vehicle. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires
and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light, located in the
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
instrument panel cluster.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message appear at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC
message to come on are:
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
and Loading Information label and its location on
page 5-66 for additional information.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was not done
or not completed successfully. The DIC message
should go off after successfully completing the
sensor matching process.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. Under these conditions the TPMS
malfunction light (low tire warning light) comes on,
and at the same time the DIC message is
displayed. The DIC message and TPMS malfunction
light should go off once the TPMS sensors are
installed and the sensor matching process is
performed successfully.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side
rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
page 5-73.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage
Also check for damaged wheels. See When It Is
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
The tires on your vehicle are different sizes front
to rear. Due to this, the tires should not be rotated.
Each tire and wheel should be used only in the
position it is in.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
(other than those originally installed on your
vehicle), brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes (other than those
originally installed on your vehicle), brands or
types, may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the correct size, brand, and
type tires on all four wheels.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
page 5-60, for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
{CAUTION:
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
Never use oil or grease on studs or the
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel
nuts might come loose and the wheel could
fall off, causing a crash.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts
{CAUTION:
Tighten the wheel lug nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off. This could lead to a
crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If
you have to replace them, be sure to get new
GM original equipment wheel nuts.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to lift your vehicle.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
{CAUTION:
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever
in PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission
to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle or the
vehicle may fall and cause your or others
injury.
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks in front of and behind the
wheels.
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow the
instructions that came with the jack, and be sure to use
the correct lifting points to avoid damaging your
vehicle.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. To lift your vehicle
properly, follow the advice in this part.
Lifting From the Front
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using spans at least
two crossmember ribs.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
For additional information, see your dealer/retailer
and the Chevrolet Corvette service manual.
The front lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Locate the front lifting points (A), according to the
illustration shown.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting From the Rear
The rear lifting points can be accessed from the rear of
the vehicle, on either the driver’s or passenger’s side.
1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), according to the
illustration shown.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has no spare tire, no tire changing
equipment, and no place to store a tire.
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
information.
Your vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. This type of
tire can operate effectively with no air pressure, so
you will not need to stop on the side of the road
to change a flat tire. You can just keep on driving. The
shorter the distance you drive and the slower the
speed, the greater the chance that the run-flat tire will
not have to be replaced. Run-flat tires perform so
well without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire has lost pressure.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
For more information, see Doing Your Own Service
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appearance Care
{CAUTION:
Interior Cleaning
Special tools and procedures are required to
service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and
procedures are not used you or others could
be injured and your vehicle could be damaged.
Always be sure the proper tools and
procedures, as described in the service
manual, are used.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would not
be covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealants
in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
To order a service manual, see Service Publications
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
soils, always try to remove them first with plain water or
club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much
of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To clean, use the following instructions:
Coated Moldings
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
These moldings are around the hatch opening in the
rear area.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
• When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft
lint-free cloth dampened with water.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
Leather
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Cargo Cover and Convenience Net
Wash with warm water and mild detergent, rinse
with cold water and tumble dry on low. Do not use
chlorine bleach.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not
use it on your vehicle or damage may occur
and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-89.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
manufacturers’ directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care product.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
• Heat and sun
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removable Roof Panel
Convertible Top
The vehicle’s convertible top should be cleaned often.
However, high pressure car washes may cause water
to enter your vehicle.
Notice: If you use a glass treatment and/or
conditioner that contains ethyl alcohol or ethyl
sulfate on the roof panel, you could damage
the panel. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Only use a GM-approved glass cleaner
on the roof panel.
When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade.
Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge.
A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and
a brush can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Do not
use detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching
agents.
Special care is necessary when cleaning, removing,
and/or storing the roof panel.
• Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then dry
the panel.
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid
spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for
a few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild
foam-type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire
vehicle, then let the top dry in direct sunlight.
• Clean a transparent roof panel with GM Glass
Cleaner. Leave the cleaner on the panel for
one minute, then wipe the panel with a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use glass cleaner on a painted roof
panel.
To protect the convertible top:
• After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is
completely dry before you lower it.
• Do not use abrasive cleaning materials on either
type of panel.
• Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted
finish; it could leave streaks.
If water drops are frequently allowed to dry on the roof
panel, impurities in the water will adhere to the top.
These impurities may etch or mar the finish. When the
panel gets wet, dry it off.
• If you decide to go through an automatic car wash,
ask the manager if the equipment could damage
your top.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finish Damage
Fiberglass Springs (Composite
Springs)
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Notice: If you use acidic or corrosive cleaning
products, engine degreasers or aluminum cleaning
agents on fiberglass springs, you may damage
the springs. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Use only approved cleaners
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
when cleaning your vehicle’s fiberglass springs.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Underbody Maintenance
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Swirl Remover Polish
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Convertible Top Cleaner
Cleans convertible tops.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Convertible Top Protector Protects convertible tops.
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt, grime,
Glass Cleaner
smoke and fingerprints.
upholstery.
Removes dirt and grime
Chrome and Wire Wheel
from chrome wheels and
Cleaner
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
Finish Enhancer
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
engine code.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring
checked right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of J-Case fuses,
mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Circuit breakers protect the power seats, power
windows, and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed
or goes away.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger side of the vehicle, under the instrument
panel and under the toe-board.
Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to access
the fuse block by pulling at the top of each corner of the
panel. Open the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can remove fuses using the fuse puller.
Fuses
SPARE
Usage
Fuses
SPARE
Usage
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
SPARE
SPARE
TPA
Tonneau Pulldown Actuator
OnStar®
ONSTAR
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Driver Door Switch
Fuses
Usage
DRIV DR
SWITCH
Electric Inside Rearview Mirror,
Heating Ventilation, Air Conditioning
ISRVM/ HVAC
TELE
SWTCH/MSM
Telescope Switch, Memory Seat
Module
CRUISE
SWTCH
Cruise Control Switch
IGN SWTCH/
INTR SNSR
TONNEAU
RELSE
Ignition Switch, Intrusion Sensor
Tonneau Release
BCK/UP LAMP Reverse Lamps
RUN CRNK
Run/Crank Relay
REVERSE
Reverse Lamps
LAMPS
HTD SEAT/
WPR RLY
Heated Seat, Wiper Relays
Blank
Not Used
ECM
Engine Control Module
STOP LAMP
Stop Lamp
SDM/AOS
SWTCH
AIRBAG
Sensing and Diagnostic Module,
Automatic Occupant Sensing
Module, Airbag
BTSI SOL/STR Brake Transmission Shift Interlock,
WHL LCK
Steering Wheel Column Lock
CLSTR/HUD
Cluster, Heads-Up Display
BLANK
Not Used
HVAC/
PWR SND
Heating, Ventilation/Air Conditioning,
Power Sounder
RDO/S-BAND/
VICS
Radio, S-Band, VICS
Exhaust Module (Z06); Spare
(Coupe and Convertible)
EXH MDL
REAR FOG/
ALDL/TOP
SWTCH
Rear Fog Lamp, Assembly Line
Diagnostic Link Connector,
Convertible Top Switch
DR LCK
Door Locks
GM LAN
RUN/CRNK
CTSY/LAMP
SWC DM
Courtesy Lamp
GM LAN Devices
Steering Wheel Dimming
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
TONNEAU
RELSE
TRUNK RELSE Trunk Release
REAR/FOG
FUEL DR
RELSE
BLANK
BLANK
Usage
Tonneau Release
Fuses
BLANK
PWR/ WNDWS/
TRUNK/FUEL
RELSE
TRUNK RELSE Trunk Release
BLANK
BLANK
Usage
Not Used
Power Windows, Trunk, Fuel Door
Release
Rear Fog Lamps
Fuel Door Release
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
PWR SEATS
MSM
Power Seats, Memory Seat Module
BLANK
BLANK
WPR/WSW
BLANK
Not Used
Not Used
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Not Used
Fuses
Usage
Cigarette Lighter
LTR
DRVR HTD
SEAT
Driver Heated Seat
WPR DWELL
BLANK
Wiper Dwell
Not Used
AUX PWR
Auxiliary Power
PASS HTD
SEAT
Passenger Heated Seat
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
There is one fuse block in the engine compartment located on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers
on any electrical component.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
20
21
Usage
Transmission Control Module/
Transmission
Horn, Alternator Sense
Antilock Brakes/Real Time Damping
Wiper
Stoplamps/Back-Up Lamps
02 Sensor
Fuel Pump
1
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Front Fog Lamp
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
22
23
24
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Battery Main 5
Park Lamps
J-Style Fuses
Usage
Cooling Fan
25
26
27
Powertrain Relay Input/Electronic
Throttle Control
Manual Transmission Solenoids
Engine Control Module/Transmission
Control Module/Easy Key Module
Odd Numbered Fuel Injectors
Electronic Suspension Control
(Option)
Canister Purge Solenoid, Mass Air
Flow Sensor
Battery Main 3
9
Antilock Brake System
Heating/Ventilation/Air Conditioning
Blower
10
11
12
13
28
29
30
31
32
33
Battery Main 2
Starter
Audio Amplifier
Blank
14
Battery Main 1
15
16
17
18
Air Conditioner Compressor
Even Numbered Fuel Injectors
Windshield Washer
Headlamp Washer
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Micro-Relays
Usage
Horn
Air Conditioning Compressor
Windshield Washer
Park, Position Lamps
34
35
36
37
19
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Micro-Relays
Usage
Front Fog Lamp
High-Beam Headlamp
Headlamp Washer
Fuel Pump
Spare Fuses
Usage
38
39
46
55
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Fuse Puller
Mini-Relays
Usage
Rear Defog
Windshield Wiper High/Low
Windshield Wiper Run/Accessory
Crank
Powertrain Ignition 1
Windshield Wiper On/Off
Low-Beam Headlamp
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
Diodes
§
§
Usage
Diode 1
Wiper
Diode 2
§
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
6.2L V8 Engine
7.0L V8 Engine
12.5 qt
11.9 qt
11.85 L
11.25 L
Engine Oil with Filter
6.2 LV8 Engine
6.2 LV8 Engine with extended oil cooler
7.0 L V8 Engine
Fuel Tank
5.5 qt
6.0 qt
8.0 qt
5.2 L
5.7 L
7.6 L
68.0 L
18.0 gal
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and Filter
Replacement)
Manual Transmission – Base
6.5 qt
3.6 qt
6.2 L
3.5 L
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
Manual Transmission – Z51
English
4.2 qt
Metric
4.0 L
Manual Transmission – Z06
Wheel Nut Torque
4.5 qt
100 lb ft
4.3 L
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Firing Order
Automatic
Manual
0.040 inch
(1.016 mm)
6.2L V8 (LS3)
W
1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
0.040 inch
(1.016 mm)
7.0L V8 (LS7)
E
Manual
1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
Engine Data
Torque
Engine
Horsepower
Displacement
Compression Ratio
6.2L V8
430 @ 5900 rpm
424 lb ft @ 4600 rpm
6.2L
10.69:1
6.2L V8 with
option NPP
436 @ 5900 rpm
505 @ 6300 rpm
428 lb ft @ 4600 rpm
470 lb ft @ 4800 rpm
6.2L
7.0L
10.69:1
11.0:1
7.0L V8
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
CAUTION: (Continued)
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
If you have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer
to have a qualified technician do the work. See
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
on page 5-5.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
{CAUTION:
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (j).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service). See
footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
•
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote (l).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders and body door
hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches, including those
for the hood, rear compartment, console door, and
any folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication
may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. If
you have the Z06 or Z51 performance package,
lubricate the outer ends of both rear toe-links.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts
as needed. To help ensure proper operation, a
pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap
and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air
conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a
year.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
page 5-90 for more information.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
(j) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-28.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle
starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires for wear and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. See Inflation -
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal down halfway,
and try to start the engine. The vehicle should
start only when the clutch pedal is pushed down all
the way to the floor. If the vehicle starts when
the clutch pedal is not pushed all the way down,
contact your dealer/retailer for service.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 2-34.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off and without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer for service.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-28.
Engine Coolant
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard can be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. However, not all synthetic
API oils with the starburst symbol
will meet this GM standard. Look for
and use only an oil that meets GM
Standard GM4718M. For the proper
page 5-17.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only GM
Part No. U.S. 88958860, in Canada
88901244, Super DOT-4 brake fluid.
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
No. U.S. 89021184, in Canada
89021186).
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Power Steering
System
Engine Oil
Chassis
Lubrication
(Rear Toe-Link
Outer Ends with
ZO6 or Z51
Option)
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part
No. U.S. 88861800, in
Canada 88861801).
Manual
Transmission
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada
992723) or lubricant meeting
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
89021677, in Canada 89021678)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
With a complete drain and refill, add
4.7 ounces (140 ml), or 6.8 ounces
(200 ml) for ZO6 Models, of
Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, in
Canada 992694) where required.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Pivots, Spring requirements of NLGI #2, Category
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood and Door
Hinges
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Canada 992887).
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
AC Delco® Part
Part
GM Part Number
Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6.2L V8 and 7.0L V8 Engines
Engine Oil Filter
15776148
A3077C
6.2L V8 Engine
7.0L V8 Engine
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plug
89017524
89017524
15848592
PF48
PF48
—
6.2L V8 Engine
7.0L V8 Engine
12571164
12571165
41-985
41-104
Windshield Wiper Blade 20.7 inches (52.5 cm)
Driver’s Side
12335960
12335961
—
—
Passenger’s Side
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact
General Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program provides for the review of
the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter,
and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed in about
70 days. We believe our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it
is informal, quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call
the General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French),
or you may write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Customer Assistance Offices
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone
(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program.
Who is Covered?
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner
is not eligible for coverage.
Services Provided
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels will not
be provided through this service.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and a
copy of the repair order are required.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in
North America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests will be limited to
six per calendar year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty related
vehicle disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from the original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement to
an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,
the claims become excessive in frequency or type of
occurrence.
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night) and
(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of
$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of
the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting
for your vehicle to be repaired.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
Scheduling Service Appointments
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
• Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction
devices.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Shuttle Service
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and
distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported
by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s
resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you can
get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-8 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Bulletins
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Or you can write to:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribe to the
OnStar® services, please refer to the OnStar®
Terms and Conditions for information on data collection
this manual for more information.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation System
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-93
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to General
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-22
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-20
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
